OrionLX/OrionLX+

User Manual

April 21, 2022

Document Revision V
© 2022 by NovaTech, LLC
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
NovaTech, LLC
13555 West 107th Street
Lenexa, KS 66215
Phone (913) 451-1880
www.novatechautomation.com
orion.support@novatechautomation.com
orion.sales@novatechautomation.com
Data classification: Public use
© Copyright 2009, 2022 by NovaTech, LLC
All Rights Reserved. All NovaTech trademarks are owned by NovaTech, LLC. All other trademarks are
the property of their respective owners.
The NovaTech Configuration Director (NCD) software may be installed on multiple computers as needed
under the following conditions:
▪ The computers must be owned by the end user or its subsidiary.
▪ The NCD installation must be used for an Orion-related project.

All files installed by NCD are protected by copyright and may not be shared with any third party. By installing
NCD on a computer, you agree to these terms and conditions.

Any repairs should be performed by NovaTech.

Disclaimer
This manual contains information that is correct to the best of NovaTech's knowledge. It is intended to be
a guide and should be used as such. It should not be considered a sole source of technical instruction,
replacing good technical judgment, since all possible situations cannot be anticipated. If there is any
question as to the installation, configuration, or use of this product, contact NovaTech, LLC at
(913) 451-1880.
To ensure that the equipment described in this User's Manual, as well as all equipment connected to and
used with it, operates in a satisfactory and safe manner, all applicable local and national codes that apply
to installing and operating the equipment must be followed. Since these codes can vary geographically
and can change with time, it is the user's responsibility to determine which codes and standards apply, and
to comply with them.
Failure to follow the instructions provided in this manual, and/or failure to comply with
applicable codes and safety standards can result in damage to this equipment, damage
to connected devices, and/or serious injury to personnel.
The OrionLX and OrionLX+ are not designed nor approved for installation or operation in nuclear facilities.
All links to external websites have been verified as correct and appropriate at the time of the publication of
this document. However, these links and websites, being outside of NovaTech LLC’s control, are subject
to change by their respective owners and may no longer be correct. In this case, please contact
orion.support@novatechautomation.com.
Authorized Representation – European Union
NovaTech Europe BVBA
Antwerpsesteenweg 124/78
2630 Aartselaar, Belgium
Phone +32 (3) 458-0807
Fax +32 (3) 458-1817
General information: info.europe@novatechautomation.com
Technical support: orion.support@novatechautomation.com

The CE version of this product is not available for purchase in Switzerland.

ii
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
The documentation for the Orion products is structured as follows.

Manual name (see cover Purpose

page of each manual)
Quick Startup Guide Describes out-of-the-box setup for quick installation.
User Manuals ▪ Description of Orion hardware and hardware options.
▪ OrionLX/OrionLX+ ▪ List of software protocol options.
▪ OrionLXm ▪ NovaTech Configuration Director (NCD) software description:
▪ OrionMX o Installation of software on PC
▪ Orion I/O o Information on running NCD
▪ User interface information for monitoring and maintenance:
o Using the Orion Webpage
o Using MMI console
• Setup and operation of the video option (-MMB for OrionLX. MMC
for OrionLX+)
Software Manuals Software manuals explain all aspects of setup and operation of protocols
such as DNP3 client and software options (Archive, Logic, DA Logic, etc.)
Tech Notes Tech Notes provide solutions for general integration, such as scaling or
setup of RS-485 networks.
Field Instructions Field Instructions provide step-by-step instructions for installation of new
hardware or software in the field.

See also Appendix F - Additional Documentation.

iii
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Styles and Symbols

In this document, fonts, text styles and symbols are used to distinguish standard text from keyboard input,
program text, GUI messages, and hyperlinks as follows. Warnings and safety notices are indicated with
ANSI symbols.

Displayed text or symbol Description

This is normal text. Standard text.
See Setup using NCD Hyperlink to text in same document.
www.novatechautomation.com Hyperlink to website.
orion.support@novatechautomtion.com Clicking this link starts email client on the PC.
See OrionLX User Manual Document name.
Minimum value Menu item or text displayed by software.
Name of the data point Text to be entered in input field or window.
Save GUI button to be clicked.
if frequency < 60.0 then Program code.
<Enter>, <Ctrl>+<G>, <G> Key to be pressed.
This yellow triangle indicates a warning that
must be observed by the users in order to
avoid possible equipment damage or personal
injury.
This yellow triangle indicates an electrical
hazard.

Electrostatic sensitive device requires proper

handling and grounding procedures to avoid
equipment damage.
DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous
situation which, if not avoided, will result in
death or serious injury.
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous
situation which, if not avoided, could result in
death or serious injury.
CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation
which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury.

Note that depending on the Windows® display settings on the computer running NCD, some of the screen
shot details may appear differently than shown in this manual. The screen shots in this manual have been
taken using Windows 10®.

iv
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

Table of Contents

I. Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 19
Introduction to OrionLX and OrionLX+ ............................................................................................ 19
Overview of the OrionLX User Manual ............................................................................................. 20
Location of Documentation ............................................................................................................... 21
Orion Setup ......................................................................................................................................... 22
Setup of Orion IP Address .......................................................................................................... 22
Setup using NCD .......................................................................................................................... 22
Setup using OrionLX Webpage .................................................................................................. 23
Setup Worksheet .......................................................................................................................... 23
Change of Passwords.................................................................................................................. 27
Operation of Orion .............................................................................................................................. 28

II. Orion Hardware ................................................................................................................................... 29

Physical Specifications ...................................................................................................................... 29
OrionLX and OrionLX CPX Specifications ................................................................................ 29
OrionLX+ Specifications ............................................................................................................. 33
OrionLX Options List ......................................................................................................................... 36
OrionLX+ Options List ....................................................................................................................... 37
Software Options ................................................................................................................................ 38
Client Protocols (field upgradable) ............................................................................................ 38
Server Protocols (field upgradable) ........................................................................................... 39
Part Number Examples ................................................................................................................ 40
OrionLX Front Panel ........................................................................................................................... 42
Diagnostic LED Description ........................................................................................................ 42
Port A1 Configuration and Diagnostic ....................................................................................... 45
Port A2 Configuration and Diagnostic ....................................................................................... 46
USB Ports ..................................................................................................................................... 47
LED Test ........................................................................................................................................ 47
OrionLX+ Front Panel ......................................................................................................................... 48
Diagnostic LED Description ........................................................................................................ 48
Port A Configuration and Diagnostic ......................................................................................... 50
USB Ports ..................................................................................................................................... 50
Reset Button ................................................................................................................................. 51
LED/Lamp Test ............................................................................................................................. 51
OrionLX Rear Panel ............................................................................................................................ 52
Power Connections ...................................................................................................................... 53
USB Ports ..................................................................................................................................... 54
Reset Button ................................................................................................................................. 55
Port B............................................................................................................................................. 55
Digital Inputs ................................................................................................................................ 57
Wiring for Independent and Isolated Inputs .................................................................... 58
Bussed Wiring for Common Wetting Voltage ................................................................. 58
Digital Outputs ............................................................................................................................. 59
Ethernet Ports .............................................................................................................................. 60
OrionLX Ethernet Ports ..................................................................................................... 60
OrionLX Ethernet PRP Card .............................................................................................. 61

v
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Field Upgrade ............................................................................................................. 62
Reading the Diagnostic Port ..................................................................................... 62
Dial-up Modem Port ..................................................................................................................... 65
IRIG-B Port .................................................................................................................................... 66
OrionLX+ Rear Panel .......................................................................................................................... 67
Power Connections ...................................................................................................................... 67
USB Ports ..................................................................................................................................... 68
IRIG-B Port .................................................................................................................................... 68
Alarm Output ................................................................................................................................ 68
OrionLX+ Expansion Slot ............................................................................................................ 68
NovaCard #0 (NC0) ............................................................................................................. 68
NovaCard #1 (NC1) ............................................................................................................. 69
NC0 and NC1 Card Digital Inputs ............................................................................. 69
NC0 and NC1 Card Digital Outputs .......................................................................... 70
NovaCard #2 (NC2) ............................................................................................................. 71
NovaCard #3 (NC3) ............................................................................................................. 71
NC3 Card Digital Inputs ............................................................................................. 71
NC3 Card Digital Outputs .......................................................................................... 72
Port B............................................................................................................................................. 73
Port 1-16 Card Options ...................................................................................................................... 74
RS-232 Serial Card (Standard/Type –A and Isolated/Type –E Version) ................................. 74
Isolated RS-485/422 Serial Card (Type –B) ................................................................................ 78
ST Fiber Serial Card (Type –C) ................................................................................................... 80
Isolated Bit Protocol Card (Type –D) ......................................................................................... 82
Isolated RS-485 Serial Card with IRIG-B (Type –G) .................................................................. 84
V-Pin HCS Fiber Serial Card (Type –H) ...................................................................................... 86
OrionLX/OrionLX+ Dimensioned Drawings ..................................................................................... 87
Mounting Instructions ........................................................................................................................ 88
OrionLX Fuse Replacement............................................................................................................... 89
Replacing Power Supply Surge Board Fuses ........................................................................... 89
OrionLX+ Fuse Replacement ............................................................................................................ 91

III. NovaTech Configuration Director (NCD) .......................................................................................... 92

Introduction to NovaTech Configuration Director .......................................................................... 92
System Requirements ................................................................................................................. 93
Copyright Information ................................................................................................................. 93
Outline of NCD Chapters ............................................................................................................. 93
Installation of NCD.............................................................................................................................. 95
Standard NCD Installation ........................................................................................................... 95
Passive NCD Installation ............................................................................................................. 95
NCD Default File Information ...................................................................................................... 96
Running NCD ...................................................................................................................................... 98
NCD Main Menu ............................................................................................................................ 98
Quick Access Toolbar ........................................................................................................ 99
File Menu ..................................................................................................................................... 101
Edit Menu .................................................................................................................................... 105
User Settings - Updates Tab ........................................................................................... 106
User Settings - General Tab ............................................................................................ 107
User Settings - Capture Tab ............................................................................................ 108
Configure Menu .......................................................................................................................... 109
Standard Software Features ........................................................................................... 110

vi
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
General .............................................................................................................................. 110
Hardware Model Information ........................................................................................... 112
Operations in Port Setup Window .................................................................................. 113
Serial Ports ....................................................................................................................... 114
Network ............................................................................................................................. 116
NKI – Time Interface ......................................................................................................... 117
Add Ons............................................................................................................................. 120
Alarm/Archive/Retentive ......................................................................................... 120
Alias .......................................................................................................................... 120
Average Archive....................................................................................................... 122
Configuration Manager Agent ................................................................................ 122
Data Logger .............................................................................................................. 125
Orion Redundancy ................................................................................................... 126
Points Blocking ........................................................................................................ 126
Pseudo ...................................................................................................................... 126
Pusher ....................................................................................................................... 126
Sensor ....................................................................................................................... 126
System Logger ......................................................................................................... 132
Text Module .............................................................................................................. 132
Hardware I/O ..................................................................................................................... 133
SER ............................................................................................................................ 133
Logic .................................................................................................................................. 140
Math & Logic ............................................................................................................ 140
Advanced Math & Logic .......................................................................................... 140
LogicPak ................................................................................................................... 141
Distribution Automation (DA) ................................................................................. 141
IEC 61131-3 ............................................................................................................... 141
Communications Menu.............................................................................................................. 142
Grouping Connections .................................................................................................... 147
Communication Window ................................................................................................. 148
Window Menu ............................................................................................................................. 150
Help Menu ................................................................................................................................... 151
Documentation ................................................................................................................. 152
Protocol Information ........................................................................................................ 153
Control Versions .............................................................................................................. 153
Program Versions ............................................................................................................ 154
System Information .......................................................................................................... 155
About ................................................................................................................................. 155

III. Orion Webpage ................................................................................................................................. 156

Introduction ....................................................................................................................................... 156
Orion Login ................................................................................................................................. 158
Home Tab .......................................................................................................................................... 160
DataValues Tab ................................................................................................................................. 162
View Input Values....................................................................................................................... 163
Column Options ............................................................................................................... 164
Force Input Value ....................................................................................................................... 166
Viewing Output Values .............................................................................................................. 168
Force Output Values .................................................................................................................. 169
View Tagging Archive ................................................................................................................ 171
Devices Tab ....................................................................................................................................... 173
Alarms Tab ........................................................................................................................................ 174
Archive Tab ....................................................................................................................................... 177

vii
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
System Tab ........................................................................................................................................ 181
Logs Tab ............................................................................................................................................ 186
Files Tab ............................................................................................................................................ 188
User Files .................................................................................................................................... 188
Selecting the Active Configuration .......................................................................................... 190
System Files ............................................................................................................................... 191
Settings Tab ...................................................................................................................................... 192
Users ........................................................................................................................................... 194
Change Password ............................................................................................................ 196
Group Management .......................................................................................................... 197
Authentication Rules ................................................................................................................. 199
User Lockout Rules .......................................................................................................... 199
Password Rules ................................................................................................................ 200
Remote Root Login .......................................................................................................... 202
Remote Accounts ....................................................................................................................... 203
Firewall ........................................................................................................................................ 204
OpenVPN ..................................................................................................................................... 208
Key Management ........................................................................................................................ 212
Create Key ......................................................................................................................... 214
System Log ................................................................................................................................. 215
Networking .................................................................................................................................. 217
General Interface Settings ............................................................................................... 219
Interface(s) Settings ......................................................................................................... 220
Advanced Networking ...................................................................................................... 221
Static Routing ........................................................................................................... 221
Network Bond(s) ...................................................................................................... 222
Network Bridging ..................................................................................................... 225
Modem ......................................................................................................................................... 226
System......................................................................................................................................... 230
Display......................................................................................................................................... 232
WebUI .......................................................................................................................................... 234
Login Message ................................................................................................................. 235
Database ........................................................................................................................... 235
Sessions ............................................................................................................................ 235
HMI ..................................................................................................................................... 235
Inactive Redirect ............................................................................................................... 237
Web Files ........................................................................................................................... 238
Link Bar ............................................................................................................................. 239
Sections............................................................................................................................. 240
Alarms ......................................................................................................................................... 242
Notifications ...................................................................................................................... 243
Colors ................................................................................................................................ 243
Database ..................................................................................................................................... 244
Tagging ....................................................................................................................................... 246
Cascaded Orions ........................................................................................................................ 250
Services ...................................................................................................................................... 251
Scheduler .................................................................................................................................... 252
Scheduling Tasks ............................................................................................................. 253
Add CSV Task ................................................................................................................... 255
Add FileMover Task ......................................................................................................... 257
Add Config Manager Agent Task .................................................................................... 258

IV. Orion MMI .......................................................................................................................................... 259

Introduction ....................................................................................................................................... 259

viii
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Connecting to the Orion MMI .......................................................................................................... 260
OrionLX Port A1 ......................................................................................................................... 260
OrionLX Port A2 and OrionLX+ Port A .................................................................................... 260
Connecting to the OrionLX with NCD ...................................................................................... 260
Unlocking a User Account ........................................................................................................ 261
MMI Menus ........................................................................................................................................ 261
File Menu ..................................................................................................................................... 262
File Transfer (PC -> ORION) ............................................................................................ 263
File Transfer (ORION -> PC) ............................................................................................ 264
Make Config File Active ................................................................................................... 265
Delete a File ...................................................................................................................... 266
View a File ......................................................................................................................... 266
Data Menu ................................................................................................................................... 268
View Input Values ............................................................................................................. 269
View Output Values .......................................................................................................... 272
Force Input Values ........................................................................................................... 273
Clear Forced Input Values ............................................................................................... 276
Force Output Values ........................................................................................................ 276
View Communications ............................................................................................................... 280
Client Port Troubleshooting ............................................................................................ 283
Server Port Troubleshooting .......................................................................................... 284
Device Statistics ......................................................................................................................... 285
System Menu .............................................................................................................................. 285
Clock Configuration ......................................................................................................... 286
View System Info .............................................................................................................. 287
View Event Log ................................................................................................................. 288
Clear Event Log ................................................................................................................ 288
View Version Info ............................................................................................................. 289
Passthrough Menu ........................................................................................................... 290
Thread Info ........................................................................................................................ 292
Restart ............................................................................................................................... 294
Disconnect .................................................................................................................................. 294
Session Timeouts ...................................................................................................................... 294
Network Menu ............................................................................................................................. 296
Basic Network Configuration .......................................................................................... 296
Start/Stop Firewall ............................................................................................................ 299

V. Orion Direct Video ............................................................................................................................ 300

Introduction ....................................................................................................................................... 300
Multimedia Options .......................................................................................................................... 301
OrionLX with MMB (Multimedia Board) ................................................................................... 301
OrionLX+ with MMC (Multimedia Card) ................................................................................... 302
Multimedia Connection/Setup .................................................................................................. 303
OrionLX Video Port Features .......................................................................................................... 304
Operating Environment ............................................................................................................. 304
Applications Menu ..................................................................................................................... 305
Settings -> Settings Manager .......................................................................................... 306
Settings -> Clear Calibration ........................................................................................... 307
Settings -> Calibrate Touchscreen ................................................................................. 307
Settings -> Toggle Browser Fullscreen Mode ............................................................... 307
Settings -> Command Line Terminal .............................................................................. 307
Accessories -> Calculator ............................................................................................... 309
Accessories -> Text Editor .............................................................................................. 309
Accessories -> Screenshot ............................................................................................. 310

ix
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Accessories -> File Manager ........................................................................................... 311
Graphics -> Document Viewer ........................................................................................ 311
Graphics -> Image Viewer ............................................................................................... 311
Multimedia -> Volume Control ........................................................................................ 312
Network -> Web Browser ................................................................................................. 313
Network -> Network Analyzer .......................................................................................... 314
System -> Terminal Emulator.......................................................................................... 315
Desktop Settings .............................................................................................................. 316
OrionLX Web Browser ............................................................................................................... 317
Setting Home Page in Web Browser .............................................................................. 318
Setting and Using Bookmarks ........................................................................................ 320

Appendix A - Glossary............................................................................................................................ 322

Appendix B - Inputs / Outputs Tools and Buttons .............................................................................. 323

1. Display/Hide Tag Name ............................................................................................................. 323
2. Search Point List ........................................................................................................................ 323
3. Toggle Show Point Detail .......................................................................................................... 324
4. Display/Hide Alias Names ......................................................................................................... 324
5. View Report ................................................................................................................................ 324
6. Edit Common Attributes ............................................................................................................ 324
7. Font Size ..................................................................................................................................... 325
8. Slider Bar .................................................................................................................................... 326
9. Point Type Filter Tabs................................................................................................................ 326

Appendix C - Backup and Restore User Configuration ...................................................................... 327

Backup User Configuration ............................................................................................................. 327
Restore Backup User Configuration............................................................................................... 328

Appendix D - Maintenance ..................................................................................................................... 331

Opening the OrionLX Enclosure ..................................................................................................... 331
Opening the OrionLX+ Enclosure ................................................................................................... 331
Orion Storage and Unpowered Standby ........................................................................................ 332
Battery Replacement ........................................................................................................................ 332
Cleaning ............................................................................................................................................. 332

Appendix E – GPL License Information ................................................................................................ 333

Appendix F - Additional Documentation .............................................................................................. 334

List of Figures

Figure 1: NovaTech Documentation Link ............................................................................................... 21

Figure 2: Documentation in Windows 10 ................................................................................................ 21

x
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Figure 3: OrionLX Front Panel ................................................................................................................. 42
Figure 4: Port A1 Location ....................................................................................................................... 45
Figure 5: Port A2 Location ....................................................................................................................... 46
Figure 6: LED Test Button ........................................................................................................................ 47
Figure 7: OrionLX+ Front Panel ............................................................................................................... 48
Figure 8: Front Panel Ports and Reset Button Access ......................................................................... 50
Figure 9: LED Lamp Test Button ............................................................................................................. 51
Figure 10: OrionLX Rear Panel ................................................................................................................ 52
Figure 11: OrionLX Power Connections ................................................................................................. 53
Figure 12: OrionLX Female and Male Power Connector Keyed for 12V dc ........................................ 53
Figure 13: OrionLX Rear USB Ports ........................................................................................................ 54
Figure 14: Reset Button............................................................................................................................ 55
Figure 15: Port B ....................................................................................................................................... 55
Figure 16: OrionLX Digital Input Connections ....................................................................................... 57
Figure 17: Independent/Isolated Input Wiring ........................................................................................ 58
Figure 18: Bussed Wiring for Common Wetting Voltage ...................................................................... 58
Figure 19: OrionLX Digital Output Connections .................................................................................... 59
Figure 20: Output Wiring .......................................................................................................................... 59
Figure 21: Dual Ethernet Ports ................................................................................................................ 60
Figure 22: Dual Ethernet/Fiber Port ........................................................................................................ 60
Figure 23: Third Ethernet Port on Multimedia Board ............................................................................ 60
Figure 24: PRP Ports on the OrionLX-CPX............................................................................................. 61
Figure 25: PRP Network ........................................................................................................................... 61
Figure 26: OrionLX Modem Connection and Blank ............................................................................... 65
Figure 27: 1PPS and IRIG-B connections ............................................................................................... 66
Figure 28: OrionLX+ Rear Panel With NC1 Expansion Card ................................................................ 67
Figure 29: Power Connector Keying ....................................................................................................... 67
Figure 30: NovaCard #0 ............................................................................................................................ 69
Figure 31: NovaCard #1 ............................................................................................................................ 69
Figure 32: NC0 and NC1 Digital Inputs and Status LEDs ..................................................................... 69
Figure 33: NC0 and NC1 Jumpers ........................................................................................................... 70
Figure 34: NC0 and NC1 Digital Outputs and Status LEDs .................................................................. 70
Figure 35: NovaCard #2 ............................................................................................................................ 71
Figure 36: NC3 Digital Inputs and Status LEDs ..................................................................................... 72
Figure 37: NC3 Jumpers ........................................................................................................................... 72
Figure 38: Standard RS-232 Communication Card (Type –A) .............................................................. 74
Figure 39: Isolated RS-232 Communication Card (Type –E) ................................................................ 75
Figure 40: Standard RS-232 Mode (Default) ........................................................................................... 76
Figure 41: Isolated RS-485/422 Serial Card (Type –B) .......................................................................... 78
Figure 42: ST Fiber Communication Card (–C) ...................................................................................... 80
Figure 43: Isolated Bit Protocol Card (Type – D) ................................................................................... 82
Figure 44: Isolated Bit Protocol Card Front View .................................................................................. 82
Figure 45: Isolated RS-485 Communication Card with IRIG-B (-G)...................................................... 84
Figure 46: Termination Resistor Jumpers .............................................................................................. 85
Figure 47: V-Pin HCS Fiber Serial Card (Type –H) ................................................................................. 86
Figure 48: OrionLX/OriopnLX+ Overall Dimensions and Panel Cutout ............................................... 87
Figure 49: Mounted OrionLX+ .................................................................................................................. 88
Figure 50: Power Supply Board Fuses, Board Revisions B-D ............................................................. 89
Figure 51: Power Supply Board Fuse, Board Revision F and Newer .................................................. 90
Figure 52: NovaTech Orion Documentation Location ........................................................................... 94
Figure 53: NCD Program Directory Structure ........................................................................................ 96
Figure 54: NCD Data Directory Structure ............................................................................................... 97
Figure 55: NCD Main Menu....................................................................................................................... 98
Figure 56: Quick Access Toolbar ............................................................................................................ 99
Figure 57: File Menu ............................................................................................................................... 101
Figure 58: Select Hardware .................................................................................................................... 103

xi
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Figure 59: Selecting Configuration for Save, Save As, Close ............................................................ 103
Figure 60: Convert Operations .............................................................................................................. 103
Figure 61: Reorder Network Ports ......................................................................................................... 104
Figure 62: NCD Prompt for Logic File ................................................................................................... 104
Figure 63: Edit Menu ............................................................................................................................... 105
Figure 64: User Settings – Updates Tab ............................................................................................... 105
Figure 65: User Settings – General Tab ................................................................................................ 107
Figure 66: User Settings – Capture Tab ................................................................................................ 108
Figure 67: Configure Menu..................................................................................................................... 109
Figure 68: General Settings ................................................................................................................... 110
Figure 69: OrionLX Hardware Configuration ........................................................................................ 112
Figure 70: Port Options .......................................................................................................................... 113
Figure 71: Chose Port for Copy/Move ................................................................................................... 113
Figure 72: Serial Port Selection ............................................................................................................. 114
Figure 73: Serial Protocol Selection Menu ........................................................................................... 115
Figure 74: Serial Port Configuration ..................................................................................................... 115
Figure 75: Network Parameter and Port Configuration ....................................................................... 116
Figure 76: Network Protocol Selection Menu....................................................................................... 116
Figure 77: NKI – Port Setup.................................................................................................................... 117
Figure 78: NKI Input Points .................................................................................................................... 118
Figure 79: Add On Options .................................................................................................................... 120
Figure 80: Alias Assignment .................................................................................................................. 121
Figure 81: Configuration Manager Agent General Settings ............................................................... 124
Figure 82: Select Port Commands ........................................................................................................ 125
Figure 83: Sensor Setup - Port .............................................................................................................. 127
Figure 84: Sensor Setup - Inputs ........................................................................................................... 127
Figure 85: Hardware I/O .......................................................................................................................... 133
Figure 86: SER Setup – Port .................................................................................................................. 134
Figure 87: SER Description .................................................................................................................... 135
Figure 88: OrionLX SER Setup – Inputs ............................................................................................... 136
Figure 89: OrionLX+ SER Setup - Inputs .............................................................................................. 136
Figure 90: SER Setup – Outputs ............................................................................................................ 138
Figure 91: Logic Options ........................................................................................................................ 140
Figure 92: NCD Communications .......................................................................................................... 142
Figure 93: Manage Connections ............................................................................................................ 143
Figure 94: Connection Information ....................................................................................................... 145
Figure 95: Creating/Saving/Loading Connection Files ....................................................................... 147
Figure 96: NCD Comm Window ............................................................................................................. 148
Figure 97: Window Menu ........................................................................................................................ 150
Figure 98: Help Menu .............................................................................................................................. 151
Figure 99: Documentation File .............................................................................................................. 152
Figure 100: Protocol Information .......................................................................................................... 153
Figure 101: Control Versions ................................................................................................................. 153
Figure 102: Program Versions ............................................................................................................... 154
Figure 103: System Information ............................................................................................................ 155
Figure 104: NCD Version Information ................................................................................................... 155
Figure 105: Connect with OrionLX ........................................................................................................ 156
Figure 106: Microsoft Edge Security Warning ..................................................................................... 156
Figure 107: Chrome Security Warning .................................................................................................. 157
Figure 108: Firefox Security Warning ................................................................................................... 157
Figure 109: Orion Login .......................................................................................................................... 158
Figure 110: Orion Homepage ................................................................................................................. 158
Figure 111: Orion Unlock Prompt .......................................................................................................... 159
Figure 112: Orion Home Tab .................................................................................................................. 160
Figure 113: DataValues – Main Page ..................................................................................................... 162
Figure 114: DataValues – View Input Values ........................................................................................ 163

xii
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Figure 115: DataValues – Column Options .......................................................................................... 164
Figure 116: DataValues – Force Input Value ........................................................................................ 166
Figure 117: DataValues – Select Output Values .................................................................................. 168
Figure 118: DataValues – View Output Values ..................................................................................... 168
Figure 119: DataValues – Force Output Value ..................................................................................... 169
Figure 120: DataValues - View Tagging Archive .................................................................................. 171
Figure 121: DataValues - Applied Tags ................................................................................................. 171
Figure 122: Devices Page ....................................................................................................................... 173
Figure 123: Alarms Tab .......................................................................................................................... 174
Figure 124: Column Setting Menu ......................................................................................................... 175
Figure 125: Alarm Archive without Filter .............................................................................................. 175
Figure 126: Alarm Archive with Filter ................................................................................................... 176
Figure 127: Archive - 1000 Most Recent Records ............................................................................... 177
Figure 128: Archive with Custom Filter ................................................................................................ 178
Figure 129: Archive –Trending .............................................................................................................. 179
Figure 130: Archive – Trend for Multiple Data Points ......................................................................... 180
Figure 131: System Page........................................................................................................................ 181
Figure 132: System Page – File System and Module Version Information ....................................... 182
Figure 133: System Page – Serial and Ethernet Interface .................................................................. 182
Figure 134: System Page – Network Stats ........................................................................................... 182
Figure 135: System Page – Memory Info .............................................................................................. 183
Figure 136: System Page – Package Versions .................................................................................... 183
Figure 137: Logs Page ............................................................................................................................ 186
Figure 138: Log Message Details .......................................................................................................... 187
Figure 139: Files Page ............................................................................................................................ 188
Figure 140: Send Files to OrionLX ........................................................................................................ 189
Figure 141: Select Active Configuration ............................................................................................... 190
Figure 142: Confirmation Prompt .......................................................................................................... 190
Figure 143: System Files ........................................................................................................................ 191
Figure 144: Settings Page ...................................................................................................................... 192
Figure 145: User Management Page ..................................................................................................... 194
Figure 146: Add User Page .................................................................................................................... 195
Figure 147: Change Own Password ...................................................................................................... 196
Figure 148: Authentication Rules – User Lockout Rules .................................................................... 199
Figure 149: Authentication Rules – Password Rules .......................................................................... 200
Figure 150: Authentication Rules – Remote Root Login .................................................................... 202
Figure 151: Remote Accounts Page ...................................................................................................... 203
Figure 152: Firewall Settings ................................................................................................................. 204
Figure 153: Firewall – Add Input Rule ................................................................................................... 205
Figure 154: Firewall Filter Options Page 1 ........................................................................................... 206
Figure 155: Firewall Filter Options Page 2 ........................................................................................... 206
Figure 156: OpenVPN Settings .............................................................................................................. 209
Figure 157: Key Management Settings ................................................................................................. 212
Figure 158: Default Key Values ............................................................................................................. 213
Figure 159: Create New Key ................................................................................................................... 214
Figure 160: System Log Setup .............................................................................................................. 215
Figure 161: Networking Settings ........................................................................................................... 217
Figure 162: Add Static Route ................................................................................................................. 221
Figure 163: Ethernet Bonding Configuration ....................................................................................... 222
Figure 164: Add Network Bridge ........................................................................................................... 225
Figure 165: Internal Modem Settings .................................................................................................... 226
Figure 166: External Modem Settings ................................................................................................... 227
Figure 167: System Settings .................................................................................................................. 230
Figure 168: Direct Video Display Options ............................................................................................ 232
Figure 169: WebUI Setup ........................................................................................................................ 234
Figure 170: Custom Login Message ..................................................................................................... 235

xiii
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Figure 171: Small Text in Header and Link Bar.................................................................................... 236
Figure 172: Large Text in Header and Link Bar ................................................................................... 236
Figure 173: Control Dialog with Tag Information ................................................................................ 236
Figure 174: Control Dialog without Tag Information ........................................................................... 236
Figure 175: Inactive Redirect Parameters ............................................................................................ 237
Figure 176: Set Link to User-defined .svg File ..................................................................................... 238
Figure 177: Link to User-defined .svg File............................................................................................ 238
Figure 178: Link Bar Example ................................................................................................................ 239
Figure 179: Link Bar Setup..................................................................................................................... 239
Figure 180: Webpage Access Security and Display Options ............................................................. 240
Figure 181: Link Bar and Header Settings............................................................................................ 241
Figure 182: Alarm Notification and Color Settings .............................................................................. 242
Figure 183: Database Settings ............................................................................................................... 244
Figure 184: Add Database User ............................................................................................................. 245
Figure 185: Tag List ................................................................................................................................ 246
Figure 186: Add New Tag ....................................................................................................................... 247
Figure 187: Tagging Button in Graphics .............................................................................................. 248
Figure 188: Setting a Standard Tag ....................................................................................................... 249
Figure 189: Setting a Custom Tag ......................................................................................................... 249
Figure 190: Cascaded Server ................................................................................................................. 250
Figure 191: Services Settings ................................................................................................................ 251
Figure 192: Scheduler – Task List ......................................................................................................... 252
Figure 193: Task Scheduling ................................................................................................................. 253
Figure 194: Task Example – Daily at 00:05 ........................................................................................... 254
Figure 195: Task Example – Every Three Hours .................................................................................. 255
Figure 196: Task List Example .............................................................................................................. 255
Figure 197: CSV Task Parameters ......................................................................................................... 256
Figure 198: FileMover Task Parameters ............................................................................................... 257
Figure 199: Schedule Config Manager Agent Task ............................................................................. 258
Figure 200: OrionLX MMI Main Menu .................................................................................................... 261
Figure 201: OrionLX File Menu .............................................................................................................. 262
Figure 202: File Transfer to OrionLX ..................................................................................................... 263
Figure 203: File Transfer OrionLX to PC ............................................................................................... 264
Figure 204: Configuration File Selection .............................................................................................. 265
Figure 205: Make Selected Configuration File Active ......................................................................... 265
Figure 206: Delete File from Flash Memory.......................................................................................... 266
Figure 207: Select File for Viewing ........................................................................................................ 266
Figure 208: View File ............................................................................................................................... 267
Figure 209: Data Menu ............................................................................................................................ 268
Figure 210: Select Port for Input Point Monitoring .............................................................................. 269
Figure 211: Input Point Monitoring ....................................................................................................... 269
Figure 212: Data View Column Editor ................................................................................................... 270
Figure 213: Data View Sort Editor ......................................................................................................... 271
Figure 214: Select Port for Output Monitoring ..................................................................................... 272
Figure 215: Output Point Monitoring .................................................................................................... 272
Figure 216: Select Port for Forcing Input Values ................................................................................ 273
Figure 217: Select Input Point ............................................................................................................... 273
Figure 218: Force Input Point ................................................................................................................ 274
Figure 219: Enter Input Point Value ...................................................................................................... 274
Figure 220: Remove Forced Input Value .............................................................................................. 275
Figure 221: Clear Input Override ........................................................................................................... 276
Figure 222: Select Port for Forcing Output Values ............................................................................. 277
Figure 223: Select Point for Forcing Output Value .............................................................................. 277
Figure 224: Forcing Output Value ......................................................................................................... 278
Figure 225: Entering Forced Output Value ........................................................................................... 278
Figure 226: Communications Menu ...................................................................................................... 280

xiv
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Figure 227: Viewing Communications .................................................................................................. 281
Figure 228: Communications Display Options .................................................................................... 282
Figure 229: Device Statistics ................................................................................................................. 285
Figure 230: System Menu ....................................................................................................................... 285
Figure 231: Clock Configuration ........................................................................................................... 286
Figure 232: System Information ............................................................................................................ 287
Figure 233: View Event Log ................................................................................................................... 288
Figure 234: Version Information ............................................................................................................ 289
Figure 235: Passthrough Menu ............................................................................................................. 290
Figure 236: Passthrough Window to Relay .......................................................................................... 291
Figure 237: Thread Info .......................................................................................................................... 293
Figure 238: Restart Menu ....................................................................................................................... 294
Figure 239: Session Timeouts ............................................................................................................... 295
Figure 240: Session Timeouts ............................................................................................................... 295
Figure 241: Network Menu ..................................................................................................................... 296
Figure 242: Basic Network Configuration ............................................................................................ 296
Figure 243: Edit Port-Specific Parameters ........................................................................................... 297
Figure 244: Network Port Configuration – Multiple Gateways Configured ....................................... 298
Figure 245: Start/Stop Firewall .............................................................................................................. 299
Figure 246: OrionLX CPX with Video, Keyboard, and Mouse ............................................................. 300
Figure 247: Additional Ports on Multimedia Board ............................................................................. 301
Figure 248: Multimedia Card Ports ........................................................................................................ 302
Figure 249: VGA Port Desktop ............................................................................................................... 304
Figure 250: Applications Menu – Main Window ................................................................................... 305
Figure 251: Settings Manager ................................................................................................................ 306
Figure 252: Touchscreen Calibration Procedure ................................................................................. 307
Figure 253: Command Line Terminal .................................................................................................... 308
Figure 254: Calculator ............................................................................................................................ 309
Figure 255: Screenshot .......................................................................................................................... 310
Figure 256: File Manager Directory Tree .............................................................................................. 311
Figure 257: Volume Control ................................................................................................................... 312
Figure 258: Open Web Browser Page ................................................................................................... 313
Figure 259: Wire Shark Network Analyzer ............................................................................................ 314
Figure 260: OrionLX MMI ........................................................................................................................ 315
Figure 261: Accessing Desktop Settings ............................................................................................. 316
Figure 262: OrionLX Login Page ........................................................................................................... 317
Figure 263: OrionLX Home Page ........................................................................................................... 317
Figure 264: Start Web Browser .............................................................................................................. 318
Figure 265: Open Menu .......................................................................................................................... 319
Figure 266: Preferences for Web Browser ........................................................................................... 320
Figure 267: Editing a Bookmark ............................................................................................................ 321
Figure 268: View and Manage Bookmarks ........................................................................................... 321
Figure 269: Input/Output Menu Tools ................................................................................................... 323
Figure 270: Edit Common Attributes .................................................................................................... 324
Figure 271: Edit Common Attributes - Details ..................................................................................... 325
Figure 272: Slider Bar ............................................................................................................................. 326
Figure 273: Filter By Point Type ............................................................................................................ 326
Figure 274: Backup File Selection ......................................................................................................... 327
Figure 275: Backup File Action ............................................................................................................. 327
Figure 276: Select File – Restore Backup............................................................................................. 328
Figure 277: Restore Items Selection ..................................................................................................... 329
Figure 278: Send File to Orion ............................................................................................................... 329
Figure 279: Restore Confirmation ......................................................................................................... 330
Figure 280: Restarting Orion.................................................................................................................. 330

xv
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

List of Tables

Table 1: Manual Overview ........................................................................................................................ 20

Table 2: Feature Configuration Overview ............................................................................................... 27
Table 3: OrionLX – Webpage and MMI Overview .................................................................................. 28
Table 4: ST Multi-mode Fiber Tx/Rx Data ............................................................................................... 29
Table 5: ST Multi-mode Fiber Tx/Rx Data ............................................................................................... 33
Table 6: OrionLX Front Panel Diagnostic LEDs ..................................................................................... 44
Table 7: Port A1 Communication Parameters ........................................................................................ 45
Table 8: Port A1 Pinout (DTE) .................................................................................................................. 45
Table 9: Port A2 USB Communications Parameters ............................................................................. 46
Table 10: OrionLX+ Front Panel Diagnostic LEDs ................................................................................. 49
Table 11: Port A USB Communications Parameters ............................................................................. 50
Table 12: OrionLX Male Connector Keying ............................................................................................ 53
Table 13: Port B Pinout (DTE) .................................................................................................................. 56
Table 14: Port B Communication Parameters ........................................................................................ 56
Table 15: Digital Input Terminal Header ................................................................................................. 57
Table 16: Digital Input Turn On Voltages and Current Draw ................................................................ 57
Table 17: Digital Output Connections ..................................................................................................... 59
Table 18: PRP Diagnostic Cable Pinout .................................................................................................. 61
Table 19: Version and MAC Address Registers ..................................................................................... 63
Table 20: Ethernet Diagnostic Registers ................................................................................................ 63
Table 21: 1PPS Terminal Designators .................................................................................................... 66
Table 22: Digital Input Terminal Pinout .................................................................................................. 69
Table 23: NovaCard Input Voltage Ranges ............................................................................................. 70
Table 24: Digital Outputs Pinout ............................................................................................................. 71
Table 25: Digital Input Terminal Pinout .................................................................................................. 72
Table 26: Digital Outputs Pinout ............................................................................................................. 73
Table 27: RS-232 Serial Card Pinout (Type –A and Type –E) ............................................................... 75
Table 28: IRIG-B Jumper Setting (Single Jumper) ................................................................................. 76
Table 29: IRIG-B Jumper Setting (Double Jumper) ............................................................................... 76
Table 30: +5V Jumper Setting .................................................................................................................. 77
Table 31: H1 Jumper (Type –A only) ....................................................................................................... 77
Table 32: RS-485/22 Selection Jumpers ................................................................................................. 78
Table 33: Pinout for RS-485 Communication ......................................................................................... 79
Table 34: Pinout for RS-422 Communication ......................................................................................... 79
Table 35: Termination Resistor Jumper Settings .................................................................................. 79
Table 36: ST Fiber Transmit Power and Receiver Sensitivity .............................................................. 80
Table 37: ST Fiber Communication Mode Jumper ................................................................................ 81
Table 38: Isolated Bit Protocol Card Pinout ........................................................................................... 83
Table 39: IRIG-B Jumper Setting ............................................................................................................. 84
Table 40: Termination Resistor Jumper Settings .................................................................................. 85
Table 41: RS-485 with IRIG-B Pinout ....................................................................................................... 85
Table 42: JP1 Settings for Echo On/Off .................................................................................................. 86
Table 43: Surge Board Fuses .................................................................................................................. 90
Table 44: OrionLX+ External Fuses for Power Input ............................................................................. 91
Table 45: NCD Program Directory Structure .......................................................................................... 96
Table 46: NCD Data Directory Structure ................................................................................................. 97
Table 47: NCD Main Menu ........................................................................................................................ 99
Table 48: Quick Access Toolbar Description ....................................................................................... 100
Table 49: NCD File Menu ........................................................................................................................ 103
Table 50: General Settings ..................................................................................................................... 111
Table 51: Port Options Operation .......................................................................................................... 113
Table 52: Orion Ports .............................................................................................................................. 114
Table 53: NKI Port – General Options ................................................................................................... 117

xvi
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Table 54: NKI – Time Interface Data Points .......................................................................................... 119
Table 55: NKI – Time Interface Parameters .......................................................................................... 119
Table 56: Alias File Format..................................................................................................................... 122
Table 57: ZIP File Naming Convention .................................................................................................. 123
Table 58: Configuration Manager Agent General Settings ................................................................. 125
Table 59: Sensor Setup – OrionLX and OrionLX+ Hardware Inputs .................................................. 128
Table 60: Sensor Setup - OrionLX+ Hardware Inputs ......................................................................... 130
Table 61: Sensor Setup - Security Points ............................................................................................. 132
Table 62: SER Setup – Port .................................................................................................................... 134
Table 63: SER Setup - Description ........................................................................................................ 135
Table 64: SER Configured Inputs Parameters ..................................................................................... 137
Table 65: SER Setup – Outputs ............................................................................................................. 139
Table 66: Manage Connections ............................................................................................................. 144
Table 67: Connection Information ......................................................................................................... 146
Table 68: Manage Connections Folders and Files .............................................................................. 147
Table 69: NCD Comm Window ............................................................................................................... 149
Table 70: Orion Homepage Menu Items ................................................................................................ 159
Table 71: Orion Home Tab...................................................................................................................... 161
Table 72: DataValue – Browsing Pages ................................................................................................ 163
Table 73: DataValues – Input Point Display Options ........................................................................... 165
Table 74: Data Values – Force Input Values ......................................................................................... 167
Table 75: Data Values – Force Output Values ...................................................................................... 170
Table 76: Data Values - Tagging Archive.............................................................................................. 172
Table 77: Trending Filters ...................................................................................................................... 179
Table 78: System Page Information ...................................................................................................... 185
Table 79: Orion File Types ..................................................................................................................... 189
Table 80: Settings Page .......................................................................................................................... 193
Table 81: User Management Commands .............................................................................................. 194
Table 82: User Account Management ................................................................................................... 196
Table 83: User Groups ............................................................................................................................ 198
Table 84: User Lockout Rules ................................................................................................................ 200
Table 85: Password Rules ...................................................................................................................... 201
Table 86: Firewall Settings ..................................................................................................................... 208
Table 87: Common OpenVPN Settings ................................................................................................. 210
Table 88: OpenVPN Client Settings ....................................................................................................... 210
Table 89: OpenVPN Server Settings ..................................................................................................... 211
Table 90: Key Management Settings ..................................................................................................... 212
Table 91: System Log Setup .................................................................................................................. 216
Table 92: OrionLX Ethernet Port Names ............................................................................................... 217
Table 93:OrionLX+ Ethernet Port Names ............................................................................................. 218
Table 94: General Interface Settings ..................................................................................................... 219
Table 95: Network Settings for Ethernet Ports .................................................................................... 220
Table 96: Static Routing Parameters .................................................................................................... 221
Table 97: Network Bonding - Settings .................................................................................................. 223
Table 98: Bonding Modes....................................................................................................................... 224
Table 99: Network Bridge Parameters .................................................................................................. 225
Table 100: Modem Settings .................................................................................................................... 229
Table 101: System Settings.................................................................................................................... 231
Table 102: Display Options .................................................................................................................... 233
Table 103: HMI Setup Parameters ......................................................................................................... 235
Table 104: Inactive Redirect Parameters .............................................................................................. 237
Table 105: Section Parameters .............................................................................................................. 241
Table 106: Notification Parameters ....................................................................................................... 243
Table 107: Database Settings ................................................................................................................ 245
Table 108: Standard Tags....................................................................................................................... 246
Table 109: Tag Fields .............................................................................................................................. 248

xvii
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Table 110: Scheduler – Task List .......................................................................................................... 252
Table 111: Task Scheduling ................................................................................................................... 254
Table 112: CSV Task Parameters .......................................................................................................... 256
Table 113: FileMover Task Parameters ................................................................................................. 257
Table 114: Serial/Ethernet Cables and Software ................................................................................. 259
Table 115: Port A1 Pinout....................................................................................................................... 260
Table 116: OrionLX File Types ............................................................................................................... 263
Table 117: Data Point Information ......................................................................................................... 271
Table 118: Force Input Point Parameters ............................................................................................. 275
Table 119: Force Output Point Parameters .......................................................................................... 279
Table 120: Client Port Troubleshooting ................................................................................................ 283
Table 121: Server Port Troubleshooting ............................................................................................... 284
Table 122: System Information .............................................................................................................. 287
Table 123: Port-Specific Parameters ..................................................................................................... 297
Table 124: Orion Direct Video ................................................................................................................ 300
Table 125: MMB Option - Port Labeling ................................................................................................ 301
Table 126: MMC Option – Port Labeling ............................................................................................... 302
Table 127: Glossary ................................................................................................................................ 322
Table 128: NovaTech Documentation ................................................................................................... 334
Table 129: Third-Party Documentation ................................................................................................. 334

xviii
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

I. Introduction

Introduction to OrionLX and OrionLX+

The OrionLX and OrionLX+ are multi-port automation platforms. They are designed to operate all ports
independently of one another. Each port can support a unique communications protocol:

▪ Client mode - connected to Intelligent Electronic Devices (IED’s) or other server devices
▪ Server mode - connected to Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) Clients or Human
Machine Interfaces (HMI’s)

Each port provides its own communication timing. All ports use a common database, which makes data
from all ports available to any other port. The OrionLX/LX+ also provides a logic processor and
logging/archiving capabilities. For practical purposes, the capability of communications with multiple IEDs
and SCADA masters make the OrionLX/LX+ a powerful RTU. The Orion acquires data from IEDs and
stores this data for polls by SCADA. SCADA commands are routed to the target IED for appropriate action.
The Orion automation platform is designed to interface with:
▪ IEDs from all major relay control and meter vendors using ASCII or binary protocols
▪ PLCs from major vendors
▪ Other devices and meters

The OrionLX comes with the following base features:

▪ Diagnostics/configuration RS-232 serial port (port A1)
▪ Diagnostics/configuration port USB Type B (port A2)
▪ Three USB Type A ports
▪ One RS-232 serial port (port B)
▪ Four digital input points and Four digital output points
▪ IRIG-B input
▪ One copper Ethernet port
▪ Up to 16 serial ports can be added, in any combination of UART (asynchronous) RS-232, RS-485,
optical fiber, and bit protocol RS-232.
▪ An optional copper or fiber Ethernet port can be added.

The OrionLX+ comes with the following base features:

▪ Diagnostics/configuration port USB Type B (port A)
▪ USB Type A ports
- One USB port (on face plate)
- Four USB ports (on rear panel)
▪ IRIG-B input
▪ Two copper Ethernet ports (ETH0 and ETH1)
▪ Up to 16 serial ports in any combination of UART (asynchronous) RS-232, RS-485, optical fiber, and
bit protocol RS-232.
▪ One serial card can be added in port B
▪ Expansion card slot for supported NovaCard option #1

19
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Overview of the OrionLX User Manual
This manual contains information for each of the OrionLX models:
▪ OrionLX (standard CPU)
▪ OrionLX (high performance CPU CPX)
▪ OrionLX+

Information that is common to all models will be presented as OrionLX. Features and capabilities that are
unique to a specific model will be notated with the respective model.

Title Content
I. Introduction General description of the OrionLX device,
documentation, and setup information.
II. Orion Hardware Description of the OrionLX and OrionLX+ hardware,
dimensions, and electrical characteristics including port
information.
III. NovaTech Configuration Director (NCD) How to use NCD, the primary tool for configuring the
OrionLX. NCD requires a PC that is running the
Windows® operating system.
IV. Orion Webpage This section details how to use the OrionLX webpage to
setup the diverse advanced features of the OrionLX.
V. Orion MMI Describes setup of the OrionLX’s IP address and
configuration of the MMI using the RS-232 or USB port
for monitoring the runtime operations of the OrionLX.
VI. Orion Direct Video Description of OrionLX Direct Video interface and Web
Browser.
Appendix A - Glossary Description of terminology.
Appendix B - Inputs / Outputs Tools and Describes the use and function of the buttons available in
Buttons the Inputs and Outputs Menus for the Orion I/O card.
Appendix C - Backup and Restore User Describes the backup and restore process of the User
Configuration Configuration using the OrionLX Web User Interface.
Appendix D - Maintenance Recommendations for storage of spares.
Appendix E – GPL License Information Information about GPL software license.
Appendix F - Additional Documentation Additional documentation that may be helpful in setting up
and using the OrionLX device.

Table 1: Manual Overview

20
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Location of Documentation
All manuals are installed as .pdf files on the PC’s hard drive during the installation process described in
chapter Installation of NCD. Once the installation of NCD has been completed, the folder containing the
Orion manuals can be accessed in NCD -> Help -> Documentation.

Figure 1: NovaTech Documentation Link

Documentation can also be accessed through the Windows® Start menu via Windows 10® Start ->
NovaTech NCD3 -> NCD Documentation.

Figure 2: Documentation in Windows 10

The documentation files are stored at: C:\Program Files (x86)\NovaTech LLC\NCD3\Docs

21
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Orion Setup
The OrionLX and the OrionLX+ provides a number of hardware and software features that are basically set
up in two stages using the NovaTech Configuration Director (NCD) and the Orion Webpage. This chapter
is intended to assist users in setting up the Orion most efficiently in terms of required Orion features and
available engineering resources.

Note: Before connecting to the Orion for the first time using an Ethernet port, the OrionLXm IP
address must first be set by connecting to the serial MMI port (see Basic Network
Configuration).

The NCD Communications window, or any communication software, can be used to connect to the Orion.
A web browser is required to access the Orion Webpage. Once connected to the Orion, configuration files,
download archives and logs, and new firmware can be transferred to/from the Orion. In addition, the firewall
can be configured, data values forced, and communication on any of the communication ports can be
logged.

The following sections show each feature of the OrionLX and the respective tool used for the setup of each
feature. This allows planning of the most efficient setup. Each entry in the table is a hyperlink to the
respective section in this manual to provide easy navigation.

Setup of Orion IP Address

As a factory setting, all Ethernet interfaces are disabled. First, connect to a serial communications port on
the Orion, either the RS-232 serial port or the USB port on the front panel of the Orion. Setting up the
communication port to the Orion is described in chapter Communications Menu.

Then enable the needed Ethernet port(s) and set up the IP addresses as described in the Network Menu
of the Orion's MMI.

Once at least one Ethernet port has been enabled and configured, the Orion webpage can be used to
configure all remaining network settings as described in chapter Networking.

Setup using NCD

The full point mapping and logic configuration for an Orion can be created using NovaTech Configuration
Director (NCD) even before the Orion is received on site. The following features are configured with NCD:

▪ Selection of Orion hardware and port setup

▪ General setup and debug features (forcing I/O)
▪ Asynchronous protocols using RS-232 ports and fiber ports, including device properties and I/O
point lists
▪ TCP protocols including setup of device properties and I/O lists
▪ Data points for network time protocols/IRIG-B
▪ System/Point Logger (standard software feature)
▪ Orion LED (standard feature)
▪ Sensor Client (standard feature)
▪ Text Module
▪ Math & Logic/Advanced Math & Logic

22
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
NCD configures the programmable elements that pertain to the applications within the OrionLX, such as
communication ports, software features, devices, points lists, logic, etc. If there are several departments
involved in the OrionLX setup, the parameters of the programmable elements are typically determined by
the engineering, substation, or communications department. Once a configuration has been created, it can
be loaded into an OrionLX using either the OrionLX’s serial MMI port, or the Ethernet port.

The latest version of NCD software can be downloaded from the Orion download site at
www.novatech-llc.com/support as soon as the customer account has been set up. As an option, the NCD
software CD can be ordered separately free of charge.

Setup using OrionLX Webpage

The features configured with the Orion Webpage are operational features and security features that are
typically set up by, or in cooperation with, an IT department.

▪ Time Synchronization: IRIG-B, UTC/Local, Modulated/Unmodulated, NTP Time Source, Time Zone
▪ User Management: Manage users, set rights, allowed services, allowed operations, clearances
▪ Authentication: Lockout rules, password rules, LDAP setup, Remote Root Login
▪ Networking: Set host name, DNS, DHCP, Gateway, IP, Subnet, Media
▪ Firewall: Set input, output, and forwarding rules, start firewall
▪ VPN: Start option, client/server, TCP/UDP, port, cipher, key, server IP address, clients
▪ Key Management: Create and manage key, certificates
▪ Services: Allow/Disallow Telnet, FTP, HTTP

Setup Worksheet
The following worksheet in Table 2 assists in configuring an OrionLX most efficiently. The Feature column
describes the features offered by the OrionLX. For each feature, the respective configuration tool is
described in columns Offline Configuration with NCD or Online Configuration with Webpage.

Steps in columns Offline Configuration with NCD and Online Configuration with Webpage can be
performed one after the other by the same engineers, or in parallel. For example, the Substation
Department can use NCD to set up field devices and I/O lists, while the IT Department can set up the
OrionLX’s network settings using the OrionLX’s webpage.

Before the OrionLX’s webpage can be accessed with a web browser, the OrionLX’s IP address must be
configured. This is done as described in chapter Network Menu of the Orion MMI. It requires a USB port
on the PC and the USB A-B cable included with Orion to connect to Port A on the Orion. Drivers for the
USB connection are installed as part of the NCD install and is also available in the Microsoft Apps Store. If
NCD is not installed on the PC, the driver will automatically install when the USB cable is connected if there
is internet access.

Once the offline configuration with NCD is completed, the .ncd file created by NCD must be transferred to
the Orion. This can be done using a serial connection or an Ethernet connection between the PC and the
Orion.

23
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Online
Offline Configuration with
Item Feature Step Step Configuration
NCD
with Webpage
001 Hardware Configuration Hardware Model Information
Select the correct Select OrionLX or
OrionLX. OrionLX+
002 Serial Protocols Serial Ports
DNP3, SEL, Modbus, For port 1 through 16 and port
etc. B, specify protocol, poll type
(client/server), then port
parameters and list of points.*
003 IP/Network Protocols Network
DNP3, SEL, Modbus, Then specify protocol, poll
etc. type (client/server), port
parameters and list of points.
Up to 96 ports can be
configured.*
004 Force Inputs/Outputs General Users grants or
Allow/Disallow forcing of disallows each
I/O points through individual user the
OrionLX MMI/Webpage ability to force I/O
for Troubleshooting, etc. points through the
OrionLX Webpage.
005 Archive Alarm/Archive/Retentive
Archive I/O points, and Refer to
view archived values with Alarm/Archive/Retentive
web browser, and transfer Software Manual.
.csv file to PC for further
processing.
006 Pseudo Client Refer to Pseudo Client
When two client stations Software Manual.
need to exchange data,
set up two corresponding
server ports on the
OrionLX, and the Pseudo
Client.
007 Data Logger Data Logger
Logs long events from Refer to Data Logger
SEL relays connected to Software Manual.
the OrionLX to the
OrionLX’s expanded
memory. Files can be
transferred using
FileMover.
008 System Logger System Logger
OrionLX system events Refer to System & Point
(e.g. startup) and point Logger Software Manual.
changes are logged to
OrionLX’s flash memory.

* Refer to specific manual for detailed description of setup.

24
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Online
Offline Configuration with
Item Feature Step Step Configuration
NCD
with Webpage
010 Pusher Server
When two server devices Pusher
(PLCs, IEDs, etc.) need to Refer to Pusher Software
exchange data, set up two Manual.
corresponding client ports
on the OrionLX, and the
Pusher Server.
011 Text Module Text Module
Based on user-specified Refer to Text Software
I/O changes, the OrionLX Manual.
creates event-specific
string messages for
further processing.
012 Monitor OrionLX Sensor for automatic setup of
Hardware OrionLX status points.
Monitor essential OrionLX
Status: Firewall, Alarm,
internal voltages, and
temperature.
013 OrionLX I/O Points See SER for setup of I/O
The OrionLX provides points.
built-in SER capable
discrete I/O.
014 Logic Functions Full logic package: Math &
The OrionLX provides Logic and Advanced Math &
freely programmable logic, Logic. Refer to Advanced
prepacked logic functions, Math & Logic Software
and IEC 61131. Manual.
Prepackaged logic: LogicPak,
see LogicPak Softawre
Manual for more information.
IEC 61131: See IEC 61131
Logic Software Manual for
more information.
015 IRIG-B/NTP NKI – Time Interface System
Set up time-related points Time-related points, such as for setting up Time
(e.g. time quality), IRIG-B OrionLX Time Quality, Zone, IRIG-B,
settings, NTP time source, OrionLX PLL Status, etc. Modulated/
and time zone. are set up automatically. Unmodulated, NTP
Time Source
016 User Accounts Users
Manage users, set
passwords and rights,
allowed services and
operations, account
expiration, menu or
command line upon login.
017 Authentication Rules Authentication
Lockout rules, password Rules
rules, enable remote login.

25
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Online
Offline Configuration with
Item Feature Step Step Configuration
NCD
with Webpage
018 Remote Accounts Remote Accounts
Account caching, LDAP,
Kerberos setup.
019 Firewall Firewall
Set input, output, and
forwarding rules; start/stop
firewall.
020 OpenVPN OpenVPN
Settings for start-up,
client, server, port, cipher,
compression, etc.
021 Key Management Key Management
Create and manage keys,
upload key files from
computer to OrionLX.
022 System Log System Log
Setup for system log host
and logged events.
023 Networking Networking
Common and per-port
settings: host name, IP
addresses, DHCP, etc.
024 Modem Modem
Setup of internal modem
(port D) and external
modem (port B).
025 System System
Setup of IRIG-B, NTP time
sources, and time zone.
026 Web User Interface WebUI
Setup of login message,
links to custom pages,
web by-page access
control, webpage
appearance, etc.
027 Alarms Alarm/Archive/Retentive Alarms
Setup of alarm points, Refer to
displays, colors, alarm Alarm/Archive/Retentive
archive data. Software Manual.
028 Database Database
Database management
and remote access setup.
029 Tagging Tagging
Tag setup and
management.
030 Cascaded Orion Refer to Cascaded Orions Cascaded Orions
IP and key parameters for Software Manual.
cascaded Orions.

26
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Online
Offline Configuration with
Item Feature Step Step Configuration
NCD
with Webpage
031 Services Services
Enable/disable Telnet,
FTP, HTTP
032 Scheduler Scheduler
Schedule moving or
emailing files and other
tasks to run at user-
specified intervals.
Table 2: Feature Configuration Overview

Change of Passwords
During, or after completing the setup of the OrionLX, the default passwords must be changed in order to
establish secure operations. This is explained in chapter Change Password.

27
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Operation of Orion
For monitoring the operation of the Orion, both the Orion webpage and serial MMI can be used individually
or in combination. Each provides a different set of features. For each feature, the respective menu item to
access the feature is listed. All entries in the following table are hyperlinks.

Feature OrionLX Webpage OrionLX MMI

View System Home Tab 5. System Menu
7. Thread Info
View Data DataValues Tab 2. Data Menu
Force I/O Points DataValues Tab 2. Data Menu
Device Statistics Devices Tab 4. Device Statistics
(poll/responses)
View/Log Communications n/a 3. View Communications
Serial Port Statistics (bytes) System Tab n/a
Network Port Statistics (bytes) System Tab n/a
Software Versions System Tab 5. System Menu
5. View Version Info
View orionlx.ntk (license file) System Tab 1. File Menu
2. File Transfer (ORION -> PC)
Event Logs Logs Tab: Specific logs 5. System Menu
viewable or downloadable 3. View Event Log
Configuration File Management Files Tab 1. File Menu
Manage Web Files Files Tab and WebUI n/a
(.svg, .js, .css, etc.)
Passthrough to connected devices n/a 5. System Menu
(IED, meters, relays, etc.) 6. Passthrough Menu
OrionLX Restart System Tab - Reboot Orion 5. System Menu
8. Restart

Table 3: OrionLX – Webpage and MMI Overview

28
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

II. Orion Hardware

Physical Specifications

OrionLX and OrionLX CPX Specifications

Processor
OrionLX CPU Intel 533MHz with hardware-accelerated
cryptography
RAM 64MB DRAM
Flash memory 256MB
Battery Lithium Panasonic BR2032 coin cell

OrionLX with CPX option CPU Intel® Atom® 1.33GHz CPU

RAM 1GB DRAM
Flash memory 4GB
Battery Lithium Panasonic BR2032 coin cell

Data Archiving & Storage (optional)

Expanded Memory 1GB or 4GB (standard with -CPX option)

Data Points
IED/SCADA Points 20,000 maximum
Refresh Rate < 2 sec typical
Actual values may be higher or lower, dependent upon the type of protocols,
number of ports used, and specified update cycles.

Data Ports
RS-232 w/IRIG-B DB9 female
RS-422/485 Compression screw terminal, #12-24 AWG
RS-485 w/ IRIG-B Compression screw terminal, #12-24 AWG
Serial fiber optic ports
ST Multi-mode Fiber Wavelength: 800–850nm

Fiber (µm) Optical Power Budget

50/125 4.2 dB
62.5/125 8.0 dB
100/140 8.0 dB
200 12.0 dB
Table 4: ST Multi-mode Fiber Tx/Rx Data

V-Pin Fiber w/IRIG-B Wavelength: 660nm, 200m fiber

Tx power: -17.3dBm to -7.2dBm Rx sensitivity: -39dBm to -13.3dBm
Bit Card RJ45
HDLC DB9 male
Ethernet – Copper RJ45
Ethernet – ST Fiber 100 BaseFX

29
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Wavelength 1300nm
50/125m fiber Tx power: -22.5dBm to -14dBm Rx sensitivity: -22.5dBm to -14dBm
62.5/125m fiber Tx power: -19dBm to -14dBm Rx sensitivity: -19dBm to -14dBm
Modem RJ11
IRIG-B Input BNC
Port A DB9 female, USB type A jack, USB type B jack for data connections
Port B DB9 female
USB Two USB 2.0 type A jacks.
Four USB 2.0 type A jacks with the multimedia board option (-MMB)

IRIG-B
IRIG-B Input Modulated or unmodulated (auto-detection of mode)
IRIG-B Output
Output (on serial ports) Unmodulated
Drive Current 24mA (max) (sufficient to drive one SEL relay on each port)

Communications
Protocols Bit or byte
Serial 1200-115kbps
Bit protocols 1200bps
Ethernet
Built-In Standard 10/100BaseT, half/full-duplex
Optional port ETH1 10/100BaseT, half/full-duplex or 100BaseFX
Optional port ETH2 10/100BaseT, half/full-duplex or 1000BaseT, full-duplex (with option -MMB)

Internal Modem (optional)

Type Dial-up; v.34 or v.92
Speed 33.6kbps or 56kbps

Alarm Output
Type Form B
Contact Ratings 10A (max)
MOV protected

Discrete Inputs
Quantity 4 built-in (standard)
Input Range
12/24 V dc Supply 9-42V dc
48-125 V dc Supply 42-150V dc
Isolation 1kV

Discrete Outputs
Type Form A
Quantity 4 built-in (standard)
Contact Ratings 10A (max)
MOV protected

30
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Indication LEDs
Power Supply Power supply 1 active Power supply 2 active
Ethernet Link and Activity Firewall active
Serial Communications TX LED for each port RX LED for each port
Modem Modem carrier
IRIG-B IRIG-B present IRIG-B quality
Built-In Inputs Status LED for each input
Built-In Outputs Status LED for each output
OrionLX Status Active Config Alarm

Direct Video (with the multimedia board option (MMB) and high performance CPU option - CPX)
Port VGA 15-pin DSUB
Resolution 1280x1024 at 60Hz, touchscreen
Audio 3.5mm Jack.Tip: left channel, ring: right channel,sSleeve: ground.
Compatible with most standard-powered PC speakers.

Terminals
Input/Output Terminals Compression screw terminals, #12-24 AWG, 1 kV Isolation
Power Terminals Compression screw terminals, #10-18 AWG

Power Supply Options

▪ 12V dc ± 20%, 3.0A peak or
▪ 24V dc ± 20%, 2.0A peak or
▪ 48V dc–125V dc, ±10%, 80W max. / 120V ac @ 50 – 60Hz, ±10%,
130VA max.
▪ 240V dc, 230V ac, -20%/+10%

The OrionLX power connection must include adequate power fusing

and power disconnect options as well as unobstructed access to the
disconnection device.

Physical
Dimensions 2U 19-inch rack
19W x 3.5H x 13.5D (inch)
Weight 9.5 lbs
Warranty 10 year limited

Environmental
Operating Temperature -40ºC to +70ºC
Operating Humidity 5%-90% non-condensing plus other IEEE 1613
Altitude 2000 meters max.

Certifications
Fast Transient IEEE C37.90.1
RFI IEEE C37.90.2
UL 61010-1 3rd Edition
FCC Title 47, part 15, subpart B - Class A

31
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
CE Mark / Safety Certifications

EN 61010-1: 2010
IEC 61010-1: 3rd Edition
EN 61326-1: 2006
IEC 61326-1: 2005

Note: Options which are not CE certified are listed in section OrionLX Options List.

32
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
OrionLX+ Specifications

Processor
CPU High performance Intel CPU 1.91GHz Quad Core
RAM 2GB DRAM
Flash memory 8GB
Battery Lithium Panasonic BR2032 coin cell

Data Points
IED/SCADA Points >20,000
Refresh Rate < 2 sec. typical
Actual values may be higher or lower, dependent upon the type of protocols,
number of ports used, and specified update cycles.

Data Ports
RS-232 w/IRIG-B DB9 female
RS-422/485 Compression screw terminal, #12-24 AWG
RS-485 w/ IRIG-B Compression screw terminal, #12-24 AWG
Serial fiber optic ports
ST Multi-mode Fiber Wavelength: 800–850nm

Fiber (µm) Optical Power Budget

50/125 4.2 dB
62.5/125 8.0 dB
100/140 8.0 dB
200 12.0 dB
Table 5: ST Multi-mode Fiber Tx/Rx Data

V-Pin Fiber w/IRIG-B Wavelength: 660nm, 200m fiber

Tx power: -17.3dBm to -7.2dBm Rx sensitivity: -39dBm to -13.3dBm
Bit Card RJ45
Ethernet – Copper RJ45
IRIG-B Input BNC
Port A USB type A, USB type B for console
USB Four USB 2.0 type

IRIG-B
IRIG-B Input Modulated or unmodulated (auto-detection of mode)
IRIG-B Output
Output (on serial ports) Unmodulated
Drive Current 24mA (max) (sufficient to drive one SEL relay on each port)

Communications
Serial protocols 1200-115kbps
Bit protocols 1200bps
Ethernet 100/1000BaseTX

33
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Alarm Output
Type Form C
Terminal Compression screw terminals, #12-24 AWG
Contact Ratings 10A (max)
MOV protected

Indication LEDs
Power Supply Power supplied
Serial Communications TX (for each port), RX (for each port)
OrionLX+ Status Alarm, Firewall, Active Config
Time IRIG-B, Quality
Redundancy Active, Standby
Ethernet (ETH0/ETH1) Activity and Link LEDs
NovaCard
Ethernet (ETH2) Activity and Link LEDs
SFP (ETH3/ETH4) ACT and LNK
Digital Inputs Inputs 1, 2, 3, 4
Digital Outputs Outputs 1, 2, 3, 4

Orion Expansion Card Options

NovaCard NC0H, NC0L
Discrete Inputs
Quantity 4 (compression screw terminals, #12-24 AWG)
Input Voltage Range NC0L: Low Range (12-24V dc nominal) or
NC0H: High Range (125-250V dc nominal)
Discrete Outputs
Quantity 4 (compression screw terminals, #12-24 AWG)
Type 2 form A, 2 form C
Contact Ratings Trip duty – 30A make, 10A carry @140V dc
Ethernet Ports One 10/100/1000BaseTX (ETH2 enp8s0), RJ45

NovaCard NC1H, NC1L

Discrete Inputs
Quantity 4 (compression screw terminals, #12-24 AWG)
Input Voltage Range NC1L: Low Range (12-24V dc nominal) or
NC1H: High Range (125-250V dc nominal)
Discrete Outputs
Quantity 4 (compression screw terminals, #12-24 AWG)
Type 2 form A, 2 form C
Contact Ratings Trip duty – 30A make, 10A carry @140V dc
Ethernet Ports One 10/100/1000BaseTX (ETH2 enp8s0), RJ45
Two SFP transceiver ports (ETH3 enp9s0, ETH4 enp10s0)

NovaCard NC2
Ethernet Ports Unmanaged switch with 12 RJ45 ports 10/100/1000BaseTX
Can be set up as single NIC or as multiple NICs

NovaCard NC3H, NC3L

Discrete Inputs
Quantity 4 (compression screw terminals, #12-24 AWG)
Input Voltage Range NC3L: Low Range (12-24V dc nominal) or
NC3H: High Range (125-250V dc nominal)

34
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Discrete Outputs
Quantity 2 (compression screw terminals, #12-24 AWG)
Type 2 form A
Contact Ratings Trip duty – 30A make, 10A carry @140V dc
Ethernet Ports Pair of PRP/HSR ports as RJ45 and SFP
2 RJ45 and SFP Ethernet ports

Direct Video option (Multimedia Card (MMC))

Port DisplayPort digital connector
Monitor Capacitive touch screen
Audio 3.5 mm Jack. Tip: left channel, ring: right channel, sleeve: ground.
Compatible with most standard-powered PC speakers.

Power Supply
HV 125-250V dc nominal, +/-20%, 100-240V ac nominal, -15%/+10%, 50-60 Hz,
50W maximum. The power supply is protected against reverse polarity. In
case of reverse polarity, the Alarm LED lights up.
LV 24-48V dc nominal, +/-20%, 50W maximum. Higher voltage does not damage
the power supply, however, it will not supply power.
Power input terminals Compression screw terminals, #10-18 AWG. recommended torque 7 in-lbs
(0.79N-m)
Note Redundant power supply is optional

The OrionLX+ power connection must include adequate power fusing

and power disconnect options as well as unobstructed access to the
disconnection device.

Physical
Dimensions 19W x 3.5H x 13.5D
2U 19-inch rack
Weight 9 lbs
Warranty 10 Year Limited

Environmental
Conforms to IEEE 1613 for temperature and humidity:
Operating Temperature -40C to +70C
Operating Humidity 5% - 95% non-condensing
Altitude 2000 meters maximum
Overvoltage Category II
Pollution Degree 2
Equipment IEC 61010-2-201 (open)

Certifications
Product Safety UL 61010-1: 2012, 3rd Edition
EN 61010-1: 2010, 3rd Edition
IEC 61010-1: 2010, 3rd Edition
EMC EN 61326-1: 2013
IEC 61326-1: 2013

35
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
OrionLX Options List

High Performance CPU (factory retrofit available)

-CPX High Performance CPU 1.33 GHz

Multimedia Board (factory retrofit available)

-MMB Multimedia Board including copper Ethernet port
10baseT: half and full duplex,100baseT: half and full duplex,
1000baseT: full-duplex

Non-Volatile Memory (field upgradable)

-XM1 1GB
-XM4 4GB (approximately 3GB available for data archiving and storage)

Ethernet Expansion Cards (field upgradable)

-ENXX Single copper Ethernet port
-ENEN Dual copper Ethernet ports
-ENFA One copper Ethernet port and one fiber Ethernet port

Port Options (field upgradable)

-Axx RS-232 card with IRIG-B
-Bxx RS-422/485 card
-Cxx ST Fiber card
-Dxx Isolated Bit card
-Exx Isolated RS-232 card with IRIG-B
-Gxx RS-485 with IRIG-B
-Hxx V-pin fiber optic with IRIG-B

xx indicates the number of cards of a specific type. Range is 1 to 16.

PSTN Modem
-MDM* Dial-up Modem

Power Supply
-12VXX 12V dc
-24VXX* 24V dc
-HVXX 48-125V dc / 120V ac
-240VXX 240V dc / 230V ac

To order dual power supplies, replace XX with the power supply option and list the higher voltage option
first. Example: -HV12V specifies “Supply 1” high voltage and “Supply 2” 12V dc.

Input Voltage
-ILV Low Voltage Inputs 12-24V dc
-IHV 48-125V dc

If not specified, the input voltage will follow S1 power supply.


These options currently do not qualify for CE marking.

36
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
OrionLX+ Options List

Port Options (P1 – P16 field upgradable)

-Axx RS-232 card with IRIG-B
-Bxx RS-422/485 card
-Cxx ST fiber card
-Dxx Isolated bit card
-Exx Isolated RS-232 card with IRIG-B
-Gxx RS-485 with IRIG-B
-Hxx V-pin fiber optic with IRIG-B

xx indicates the number of cards of a specific type. Range is 1 to 16.

Port B (field upgradable)

-PBPS RS232 serial port plus pin #1 (RI)
-PBA RS-232 card with IRIG-B
-PBB RS-422/485 card
-PBC ST fiber card
-PBD Isolated bit card
-PBE Isolated RS-232 card with IRIG-B
-PBG RS-485 with IRIG-B
-PBH V-pin fiber optic with IRIG-B

Orion Expansion Slot

-NC0x 1 copper NIC
4in/4out where x indicates the input voltage
▪ L for low voltage 12-24V dc
▪ H for high voltage 125-250V dc
-NC1x 1 copper NIC and 2 SFP NICs
4in/4out where x indicates the input voltage
▪ L for low voltage 12-24V dc
▪ H for high voltage 125-250V dc
-NC2 12 RJ45 Ethernet ports as unmanaged switch
-NC3x 4in/2out, pair of PRP/HSR RJ45 and SFP ports, 2 RJ45 and SFP Ethernet
ports
4in/2out where x indicates the input voltage
▪ L for low voltage 12-24V dc
▪ H for high voltage 125-250V dc

Multimedia Card
-MMC DisplayPort video connector
Audio port - 3.5mm Jack

Power Supply
-HVxx High voltage power supply: 125-250V dc nominal, +/-20%, 100-240V ac
nominal, -15%/+10%, 50-60 Hz
-LVxx Low voltage power supply: 24-48V dc nominal, +/-20%, 50 watts maximum.

Note - xx = specifies optional power supply #2 version, either HV or LV

37
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Software Options
This section and the following client protocol, and server protocol sections, are the same for all OrionLX
models.

-35 LogicPak Module

-57 Webserver XML
-80 Passthrough Interface Client Module
-81 iDial Module
-82 DA Logic Module
-83 Math & Logic Module
-93 Passthrough Interface Server Module
-94 Relay “Data Logger” or I-Log
-95 Alarm/Archive/Retentive Module (requires option -XM4)
-96 Email Module
-97 Cascaded OrionLX Client Module
-98 Cascaded OrionLX Server Module
-99 Advanced Math & Logic
-100 Average Archive Server
-101 IEC 61131-3 Module
-102 NSYNC
-103 IEC 61850 Client/Server/GOOSE
-104 Connection Manager Agent
-105 Points Blocking Module
-106 Configuration Manager Agent
-107 Automatic Changeover Device Logic
-108 Tile Annunciator

Client Protocols (field upgradable)

-01 DNP3 Serial
-03 DNP3 IP
-04 Modbus Serial
-07 Modbus TCP
-08 Basler DFPR
-09 GE DLP
-10 ABB DPU
-11 OPTIMHO
-12 PG&E 2179
-13 RFL
-14 SEL ASCII/Fast Messaging
-15 Tejas V
-16 DTO
-18 KITZ
-24 CDC-I & II
-25 L&G 8979
-27 HDLC
-28 DF1
-29 DQI
-30 SPAbus
-32 SEL2030
-33 Generic ASCII
-34 HTTP
-36 IEC 60870-5-103
-37 SEL TCP

38
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
-38 Conitel 2020/300
-39 IEC 6080-5-101
-103 IEC 61850 Client/Server/GOOSE
-201 PML
-202 ABB 10Byte
-203 Harris 5000/6000
-204 IEC60870-5-104

Server Protocols (field upgradable)

-41 Conitel 2020/300
-42 DNP3 Serial
-44 DNP3 IP
-46 L&G 8979
-47 Modbus Serial
-49 Modbus TCP
-51 Harris 5000/6000
-52 Pusher
-55 ASCII IED Web
-56 REDAC 70-H
-60 Accumulator Freeze
-61 CDC-I & II
-67 IEC 60870-5-101
-68 IEC 60870-5-104
-69 Tejas V
-70 SPS
-71 SES-92
-72 ICCP

39
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Part Number Examples

OrionLX CPX example with the options listed below.

ORIONLX-A8-B4-C4-ENXX-MDM-CPX-XM4-IHV-HVXX-01-03-07-12-42-44-46-81-83

Hardware Options

A8 – Eight standard RS-232 port

B4 – Four RS-485/422 ports
C4 – Four fiber ports
ENXX – Single RJ45 Ethernet port
MDM – Dial-up modem
CPX – High performance CPU
XM4 – 4GB non-volatile memory
IHV – Input High Voltage (48-125 V dc)
HVXX – One - 48V dc – 125V dc/120V ac power supply

Client Protocols

01 - DNP3 serial
03 - DNP3 IP
07 - Modbus TCP
12 - PG&E 2179

Server Protocols

42 - DNP3 serial
44 - DNP3 IP
46 - L&G 8979

Software Options

81 - iDial
83 - Math & Logic

40
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
OrionLX+ example with the options listed below.

ORIONLX+-A8-B4-C4-PBPS-NC1H-MMC-HVHV-01-03-07-42-44-35

Hardware Options

A8 – Eight, standard RS-232 port

B4 – Four, RS-485/422 ports
C4 – Four, fiber ports
PBPC – RS232 serial port plus Pin#1 (RI)
NC1H –Expansion card with HV inputs
MMC – Multi Media Card
HVHV – Redundant high voltage power supplies

Client Protocols

01 - DNP3 serial
03 - DNP3 IP
07 - Modbus TCP

Server Protocols

42 - DNP3 serial
44 - DNP3 IP

Software Options

35 - LogicPak

41
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
OrionLX Front Panel
The OrionLX front panel provides visual diagnostic indication and connections for advanced user
diagnostics. The front panel provides LEDs to indicate Port, Power, Input, Output, Ethernet, Security, Time,
Modem and Configuration status. In addition, the front panel provides a DB9 port and a USB port for
advanced serial diagnostics.

Figure 3: OrionLX Front Panel

Diagnostic LED Description

The OrionLX provides the following diagnostic LEDs.

LED Function
TX/RX (Ports A, B, and 1 through 16) Ports A, B, and 1 through 16 have green Tx and
red Rx LEDs. The LEDs will illuminate when
bytes are transmitted or received at the respective
communication ports. This indicates only the
presence of communication, without any
verification as to checksum, device or register
addressing, or a server device receiving the
Orion’s communication, etc.
Power (Status, Supply 1, Supply 2) ▪ When the Status LED is illuminated, nominal
5V dc is present on the OrionLX motherboard.
▪ Supply 1 – When Supply 1 is illuminated,
nominal 5V dc is supplied from “Power 1”.
▪ Supply 2 – When Supply 2 is illuminated,
nominal 5V dc is supplied from “Power 2”.

42
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
LED Function
Alarm The Alarm LED indicates an alarm condition upon
restart until such time as the unit has verified
normal operating conditions. If the alarm
condition persists, the LED will remain on.
Specifically, the Alarm LED is illuminated as
follows (The Alarm Contact on the rear panel of
the Orion follows the LED, i.e. when the LED is
illuminated, the contact is closed, and vice versa).
1. Orion start/restart (full restart and quick
restart): from beginning of the start to when the
diagnostics menu is displayed again.
2. If during the start, either a driver was not
detected (i.e. the .ncd file included the driver,
but the Orion was not set for it), or a port could
not be opened, the LED and output remain
active until the problem is corrected.
Inputs The Input LED’s will illuminate when the Inputs on
the rear panel detect voltage.

Outputs The Output LED’s will illuminate when the Outputs

on the rear panel are closed.

Ethernet Link/Activity The Ethernet Link LED will illuminate when a

physical link to another device has been detected.
The Ethernet Activity LED will illuminate when the
OrionLX is transmitting or receiving on a specific
port.

Firewall The Firewall LED will illuminate when the Firewall

is configured and active.
See Firewall on the OrionLX webpage for more
information.

43
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
LED Function
L1, L2, L3 Reserved for future use.

Time IRIG-B, Quality ▪ The IRIG-B LED will illuminate when IRIG-B is
connected.
▪ The Quality LED will illuminate when time
accuracy is < 1ms.

Modem CD The Modem CD LED will illuminate when the

Modem is off hook and has detected a carrier.

Active Config The Active Config LED will illuminate when there
is an active configuration file running on the
OrionLX unit.

Table 6: OrionLX Front Panel Diagnostic LEDs

44
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Port A1 Configuration and Diagnostic
The OrionLX provides built-in diagnostics for viewing of data values, port communications, device statistics,
system events, and system/version information. It also allows changing of network settings, and
configuration file, firmware file, and log file transfers via Z-Modem (bi-directional), as well as passthrough
to connected relays and meters. This allows using the respective manufacturer’s programming software to
configure the relays and meters, retrieve event information, etc.

Figure 4: Port A1 Location

Port A1 is the designated diagnostics/configuration port. As such, none of Port A1’s parameters can be
changed. It is an RS-232 serial port with the following pinout (Table 8) on a DB9 female connector. The
port is a DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) port, as opposed to a DCE (Data Communication Equipment,
such as modems) port. Port A1 uses the communication parameters shown in Table 7. Those parameters
are fixed and cannot be changed.

Port Parameter Value

Pinout DTE (Data Terminal Equipment)
Baud Rate 115,200 (fixed)
Parity Bits None (fixed)
Data Bits 8 (fixed)
Stops Bits 1 (fixed)
Default Login Name novatech (case sensitive)
Default Password novatech (case sensitive)
Default Root Name root (case sensitive)
Default Root Password novatech (case sensitive)
Password Back Door There is no back door.

Table 7: Port A1 Communication Parameters

DB9 Female Definition

2 Rx (Receive)
3 Tx (Transmit)
5 Gnd (Ground)

Table 8: Port A1 Pinout (DTE)

45
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Port A2 Configuration and Diagnostic
Port A2 is located on the front panel adjacent to Port A1 and uses a USB Type B connector. The OrionLX
provides built-in diagnostics for viewing data values, port communications, device statistics, system events,
and system/version information. Port A2 also allows changing network settings, and configuration file,
firmware file, and log file transfers via Z-Modem (bi-directional).

Figure 5: Port A2 Location

A “Male A/B USB 2.0 Cable” is included with the OrionLX shipment. The PC connecting to the OrionLX will
require a USB device driver before serial communications can be established. The “Silicon Laboratories
CP210x Driver” is part of the NCD installation.

The communication parameters are as follows.

Port Parameter Value

Interface USB B Female
Baud Rate 115,200 (fixed)
Parity Bits None (fixed)
Data Bits 8 (fixed)
Stops Bits 1 (fixed)
Default Login Name novatech (case sensitive)
Default Password novatech (case sensitive)
Default Root Name root (case sensitive)
Default Root Password novatech (case sensitive)
Password Back Door None (fixed)

Table 9: Port A2 USB Communications Parameters

46
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
USB Ports
The OrionLX is equipped with three USB A-type ports.

USB1 is located adjacent to Port A2 on the front panel of the OrionLX (see Figure 5), and uses a USB A-
type connector.

USB Ports 2 and 3 are located on the OrionLX Rear Panel (see Figure 10), and use USB A-type connectors.
These ports can be used for approved peripheral devices such as USB flash drives to transfer files.

If the Multimedia Board option (-MMB) is installed (see Figure 247), two additional USB ports are available
for keyboard and mouse.

LED Test
The OrionLX is equipped with an LED test button. When pressed, all LEDs will illuminate until the button
is released. Once released, the LEDs will return to normal functionality. This button is recessed and
requires a precision screwdriver or paper clip to press.

Figure 6: LED Test Button

47
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
OrionLX+ Front Panel
The OrionLX+ front panel provides visual diagnostic indication and connections for advanced user
diagnostics. The front panel provides LEDs to indicate Port, Alarm, Time, Redundancy, Firewall, and
Configuration status. The Power Supply modules have LEDs for Power and Alarm status. In addition, the
front panel provides two USB ports, one (Port A) for configuration and advanced serial diagnostics and one
(USB 1) for approved peripheral devices such as USB flash drives to transfer files.

Figure 7: OrionLX+ Front Panel

Diagnostic LED Description

The OrionLX+ provides the following diagnostic LEDs.

LED Function
TX/RX (Ports A, B, and 1 through 16) Ports A, B, and 1 through 16 have green Tx and
red Rx LEDs. The LEDs will illuminate when
bytes are transmitted or received at the
respective communication ports. This indicates
only the presence of communication, without any
verification as to checksum, device or register
addressing, or a server device receiving the
Orion’s communication, etc.
Alarm The red Alarm LED indicates an alarm condition
upon restart until such time as the unit has verified
normal operating conditions. If the alarm
condition persists, the LED will remain on.
Specifically, the Alarm LED is illuminated as
follows (The Alarm Contact on the rear panel of
the Orion follows the LED, i.e. when the LED is
illuminated, the contact is closed, and vice versa).
1. Orion start/restart (full restart and quick
restart): from beginning of the start to when the
diagnostics menu is displayed again.
2. If during the start, either a driver was not
detected (i.e. the .ncd file included the driver,
but the Orion was not set for it), or a port could
not be opened, the LED and output remain
active until the problem is corrected.

48
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
LED Function
Time ▪ The IRIG-B LED will illuminate when IRIG-B is
connected.
▪ The Quality LED will illuminate when time
accuracy is < 1ms.

Redundancy Only active if the OrionLX+ is configured for

redundancy.
▪ The green Active LED indicates the current
active unit.
▪ The green Standby LED indicates the current
standby unit.

L1, L2, L3 LEDs reserved for future use.

Firewall The Firewall LED will illuminate when the Firewall

is configured and active.
See Firewall on the OrionLX webpage for more
information.

Active Config The Active Config LED will illuminate when there
is an active NCD configuration file running on the
OrionLX+ unit.

Power Supply ▪ The green Power LED indicates proper output

voltage from the suppy.
▪ The red Alarm LED illuminates if there is a
problem detected with the power supply.

Table 10: OrionLX+ Front Panel Diagnostic LEDs

49
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Port A Configuration and Diagnostic
Port A is located on the front panel and uses a USB Type B connector. The OrionLX+ provides built-in
diagnostics for viewing data values, port communications, device statistics, system events, and
system/version information. Port A also allows changing network settings, and configuration file, firmware
file, and log file transfers via Z-Modem (bi-directional).

Figure 8: Front Panel Ports and Reset Button Access

A “Male A/B USB 2.0 Cable” is included with the OrionLX+ shipment. The PC connecting to the OrionLX+
will require a USB device driver before serial communications can be established. The USB driver for the
PC is installed with NCD. The PC can also obtain this driver from the Internet when it first connects to the
OrionLX+.

The communication parameters are as follows.

Port Parameter Value

Interface USB B Female
Baud Rate 115,200 (fixed)
Parity Bits None (fixed)
Data Bits 8 (fixed)
Stops Bits 1 (fixed)
Default Login Name novatech (case sensitive)
Default Password novatech (case sensitive)
Default Root Name root (case sensitive)
Default Root Password novatech (case sensitive)
Password Back Door None (fixed)

Table 11: Port A USB Communications Parameters

USB Ports
The OrionLX+ is equipped with five USB A-type ports. USB 1 is located on the front panel adjacent to Port
A (Figure 8) and there are four USB ports on the rear panel directly below ETH0 and ETH1 (Figure 28).

50
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Reset Button
The OrionLX+ is equipped with a reset button on the front panel so the OrionLX+ can be restarted without
manually removing power from the unit. The access hole for the recessed reset button is located to the left
of Port A (Figure 8) and is intentionally unlabeled.

The unit reset has two levels depending on how the reset is initiated:
▪ A simple press and release will start a CPU reset.
▪ If the reset switch is pressed for 5 seconds and then released, a power cycle reset will occur. The
Power Supplies will power down and then power up to initiate the unit restart.

LED/Lamp Test
The OrionLX+ is equipped with an LED test button. When pressed, all LEDs will illuminate until the button
is released. Once released, the LEDs will return to normal functionality.

Figure 9: LED Lamp Test Button

51
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
OrionLX Rear Panel
The unit identification plate including the model number and the serial number is located on the upper left
of the backside of the unit. These identification numbers are required for any technical support for the unit.
The part number included on the label defines how the unit left the factory. NovaTech does not track field-
installed options.

Figure 10: OrionLX Rear Panel

When the OrionLX is connected to power, touching the power

connectors on the outside of the OrionLX enclosure, or removing the
top cover of the OrionLX enclosure and touching the power supply
inside the enclosure, could result in injury or death. Proper
corporate and public safety instructions must be observed at all
times.

The connections for Power, Port B, ports P1 to P16, Ethernet, Modem, Inputs, Outputs, USBs and IRIG-B
are described below in the respective chapters.

52
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Power Connections
The OrionLX power input is located at the bottom left of the rear panel. The OrionLX offers several power
supply options as well as an optional second power supply.

For each of the power supplies, its voltage is indicated on the label above it as shown in the following figure.

Figure 11: OrionLX Power Connections

#10-18 AWG wire is recommended, stripping the insulation between 1/4” to 3/8”. The GND lug is a #8
stainless steel screw that is connected to the chassis, and must be connected to Earth Ground. A size #8
ring or spade lug connector is recommended. NovaTech recommends that all grounding be performed in
accordance with ANSI/IEEE C57.13.3-1983.

The OrionLX uses removable screw terminal compression fittings for user power connections. These
connectors are keyed by voltage level so that a plug keyed for one voltage level cannot be plugged into a
socket keyed for another voltage level. See example in Figure 12.

Key slot Key

Key Key Slot

Figure 12: OrionLX Female and Male Power Connector Keyed for 12V dc

Supply Input Range Male Connector Key

48-125V dc / 125V ac 110
24V dc 010
12V dc 001

Table 12: OrionLX Male Connector Keying

53
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
The OrionLX offers several voltage options for “Power 1” and the optional redundant power supply, “Power
2”. The OrionLX motherboard circuitry combines the output of these two power supplies into a constant 5V
dc which is required to operate the OrionLX. The purpose of this feature is not only to provide continued
operation if one of OrionLX’s power supplies fails, but also to connect the OrionLX to two different power
sources to allow the OrionLX to continue operation when one power source is lost.

The OrionLX motherboard uses 4.7 V dc as the threshold for good/bad power. NCD provides two points
for indicating power; “Supply 1” and “Supply 2”. Since the OrionLX cannot communicate without one of the
two supplies operating properly, the “Status” indication is assumed to always be on.

The OrionLX provides internal surge suppression circuitry that meets and has been tested to C37.90.1
standards. This circuitry assists with surges, but requires proper grounding of the OrionLX to be effective.

USB Ports
The OrionLX is equipped with three (3) USB A-type ports.

USB1 is located adjacent to Port A2 on the front panel of the OrionLX (see Figure 3), and uses a USB A-
type connector. USB Ports 2 and 3 are located on the OrionLX Rear Panel (see Figure 10), and use USB
A-type connectors. These ports can be used for approved peripheral devices such as USB flash drives to
transfer files.

Figure 13: OrionLX Rear USB Ports

If the Multimedia Board option (-MMB) is installed (see Figure 23), two additional USB ports are available
for keyboard and mouse connections.

54
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Reset Button
The OrionLX is equipped with a recessed reset button on the rear panel so the OrionLX can be restarted
without cycling power. The reset button is recessed and intentionally unlabeled to keep individuals unaware
of the OrionLX from using this feature. The reset button is located between the “Power 1” connector and
“USB 2”.

The reset button will send a reset to the OrionLX CPU and cause the CPU to fully reboot. This procedure
can vary in time from 30 seconds to several minutes, but typically takes approximately 45 seconds.

Recessed Reset Button

Figure 14: Reset Button

Port B
Port B is an RS-232 serial port with a DB9 female connector as shown in the following figure and table. In
NCD, it can be set up for any serial protocol. Unlike ports 1-16, port B is a fixed RS-232 port which cannot
be exchanged by another type of port. It does not provide an IRIG-B output. The port is a DTE port.

If an external modem is connected to port B, port B must be set up as described in chapter Modem. No
NCD configuration is required.

When port B is used as a second MMI port, its baud rate can be adjusted as described in Modem. For this
use, this is the only configuration required, i.e. no configuration in NCD is required.

If port B is used as a protocol port, it must be configured accordingly in NCD as described in chapter Serial
Ports.

Figure 15: Port B

55
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
DB9 Female Signal Definition
2 Rx Receive
3 Tx Transmit
4 DTR* Data Terminal Ready
5 Gnd Signal Ground
6 DSR* Data Set Ready
7 RTS Request to Send
8 CTS Clear to Send

Table 13: Port B Pinout (DTE)

*Note: An OrionLX with the High Performance CPU option (-CPX) does not provide DTR and DSR
as described in Table 13.

The communication parameters can be set as follows.

Parameter Range
Baud Rate 1,200-115,200
Parity None, Odd, Even
Data Bits 5, 6, 7, 8
Stop Bits 1, 2

Table 14: Port B Communication Parameters

56
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Digital Inputs
The OrionLX has 4 digital inputs on the rear panel. These inputs use an orange compression screw terminal
connector that accepts #12-24 gauge wire. The digital inputs are factory set to either 12-24V dc or 48-
125V dc inputs as indicated by the checkbox positioned over the input connector.

Note: Digital inputs should only be used for secondary (non-main) circuits up to 125V dc. See
Table 16 for exact voltage ranges.

The input circuitry provides 1000V channel-to-channel isolation. Inputs can be time stamped to 1ms when
the OrionLX is receiving quality time synchronization.

Figure 16: OrionLX Digital Input Connections

Function In4 + In4 - In3 + In3 - In2 + In2 - In1 + In1 -

Terminal 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11

Table 15: Digital Input Terminal Header

Input Range Turn-On Voltage Max. Current Drain

12/24V dc 9-36V dc 2.1 mA per input
48/125V dc 36-150V dc 2.1 mA per input

Table 16: Digital Input Turn On Voltages and Current Draw

57
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Wiring for Independent and Isolated Inputs

The following input wiring is required for independent and isolated inputs.

Circuit Diagram – SER Model

Connections for independent inputs
+ OrionLX
12
In1 - In1
V 11
+ Inputs
14
electrically
In2 - 13 In2
V isolated
+ 16 from each
In3 - 15
In3 other
V
+ 18
In4 - 17
In4
V
Inputs polarity
sensitive

Figure 17: Independent/Isolated Input Wiring

The OrionLX inputs are polarity sensitive and must be wired correctly. Internally, the
inputs are electrically isolated from each other.

Bussed Wiring for Common Wetting Voltage

When using a common wetting voltage, the following wiring is required.

V
OrionLX
In1 + 12
- 11
In1
In2 + 14
- 13 In2
In3 + 16
- 15 In3
In4 + 18
- 17 In4
Inputs polarity
sensitive

Figure 18: Bussed Wiring for Common Wetting Voltage

58
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Digital Outputs
The OrionLX has 4 Digital Outputs and an Alarm (ALM) contact on the rear panel. These outputs utilize a
black compression screw terminal connector. All digital outputs are relay dry contacts and are Normally
Open (NO). The ALM contact is also a dry contact, but is Normally Closed (NC).

Note: The digital outputs and the ALM contact should only be used for secondary (non-main)
circuits up to 125V dc.

The Alarm output is a form B relay output. The output indicates an Alarm condition upon restart until such
time as the unit has verified normal operating conditions. The red LED on the front panel positioned under
the Power LEDs also indicates the Alarm condition (see Figure 3).

Figure 19: OrionLX Digital Output Connections

´

Function ALM ALM Out4 Out4 Out3 Out3 Out2 Out2 Out1 Out1
B A B A B A B A B A
Terminal 32 31 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21

Table 17: Digital Output Connections

Circuit Diagram – SER Model

Connections for independent inputs OrionLX
V 21
Out1 Out1
Load 22
In1
V 23
Out2 24 Out2
Load

Figure 20: Output Wiring

59
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Ethernet Ports
OrionLX Ethernet Ports

The OrionLX comes with one Ethernet port. An optional second Ethernet port can be added. This option
is field-upgradeable.

Figure 21: Dual Ethernet Ports

Figure 22: Dual Ethernet/Fiber Port

If ordered with one Ethernet port, it is labeled ETH0. This is a 10/100BaseT full-duplex port with an RJ45
female connector. If ordered with two Ethernet ports, they are labeled ETH0 and ETH1. The second
Ethernet port can either be a 10/100BaseT full-duplex port with an RJ45 female connector or it can be a
100Base-FX Fiber port with ST connectors.

If the Multimedia Board option (-MMB) has been ordered, a third Ethernet port labeled ETH2 is available
as shown below. This option is not field-upgradeable.

Figure 23: Third Ethernet Port on Multimedia Board

60
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
OrionLX Ethernet PRP Card

The Ethernet Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP) card is an alternative to the standard Ethernet cards
described in the previous section. The PRP card supports parallel redundant Ethernet connections. The
PRP card is only available with the OrionLX-CPX. Figure 24 displays the PRP interfaces as they appear
when installed into an Orion.

Figure 24: PRP Ports on the OrionLX-CPX

The LAN A and LAN B ports are dual attached nodes (DANs) that provide parallel connection to other
devices via two networks. The LAN ports are RJ-45 Ethernet ports and feature LEDs that illuminate when
link and activity are detected.

The diagnostics port, labeled PRP DIAG on the Orion, can be connected to a PC to enable a diagnostic
user interface for the PRP card. The diagnostics port uses an RJ-11 connector. The following table
describes the cable pinout for this port.

Pin Number Description

2 Receive Data
3 Transmit Data
5 Signal Ground / Common

Table 18: PRP Diagnostic Cable Pinout

The PRP card provides a redundant connection to the destination device, thereby preventing packet loss
when one of the two Ethernet connections fails. The Orion DAN (Figure 24) transmits its packets over both
ports to the respective network switches. A DAN on the destination device receives the packets from the
switches. The destination DAN uses the first packet that arrives from the source, ignoring the second
packet. If one of the connections is down, the destination DAN continues to receive packets via the other
connection.

Figure 25: PRP Network

61
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
This network design ensures message delivery without time delay by sending duplicate packets on each
network.

Note: The LAN A and LAN B use the Eth0 settings configured for the OrionLX. Eth1 is not available
with the PRP card. The PRP card MAC address is unique to each card.

Field Upgrade

The optional Ethernet PRP card may either ship preconfigured in an OrionLX-CPX or require a manual
installation. To replace the standard Ethernet card with the PRP card, complete the following steps.

When removing a cover from the Orion, observe precautions for handling electrostatic
sensitive devices.

1. Power down the Orion.

2. Remove the screws securing the Orion top cover and the two top screws in each corner of the
faceplate.

3. Remove the Orion top cover.

4. Remove the two screws that attach the standard Ethernet card to the Orion case.

5. Pull the Ethernet card out of the Orion so that the cables can be accessed. Take note of which
cable is connected to each plug.

6. Disconnect the red and blue cable from the standard Ethernet card.

7. Connect the cables to the Ethernet PRP card (Red cable to P4, Blue cable to P2).

8. Insert the PRP card into the slot along the guides. Push the PRP card in until connection is made
to the mother board.

9. Secure the PRP card to the Orion case with the two retention screws.

10. Reattach the Orion top cover and re-install the two screws to the top corners of the faceplate.

11. Power up the Orion.

Reading the Diagnostic Port

The PRP card features a diagnostics port that allows you to read various recorded counter values and the
card’s MAC address. Commands and responses are issued using hex addresses. To communicate with
the PRP card, complete the following steps. If a connection has already been set up with the diagnostics
port in NCD, proceed to step 5.

1. Connect your PC serial port to the PRP DIAG port on the back of the Orion.

Note: The PRP DIAG port requires an RJ-11 connector, see Table 18 for pinout.

2. In NovaTech Configuration Director (NCD), open Communications -> Online Connections.

62
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
3. In the Manage Connections dialog box, click the New Connection button.

4. In the Connection Information dialog box, complete the following steps:

a. In the Connection Name field, enter a name for the connection.
b. Verify that the Serial option is selected.
c. In the Comm Port list, select the port your PC uses to connect to the PRP DIAG port.
d. Verify that Baud Rate is set to 115200.
e. Verify that Data Bits is set to 8.
f. Verify that Stop Bits is set to 1.
g. Verify that Parity is set to None.
h. Click OK.

5. In the Manage Connections dialog box, select the connection configured for the diagnostics port
and click Connect.

6. In the MMI window, press any key. A greater than (>) symbol displays, serving as a prompt for a
command.

You can read the following information from the PRP card.

Hex Address Data Returned Format

0x0000 PRP Firmware Version N/A
0x000C MAC Address LO Low 32 bits of MAC address
0x0010 MAC Address HI High 16 bits of MAC address

Table 19: Version and MAC Address Registers

Hex Address Data Returned

0x014C LAN A Received Frames
0x0150 LAN A Transmitted Frames
0x0154 LAN A Frame Errors (CRC)
0x0158 LAN A Wrong LanID Errors
0x024C LAN B Received Frames
0x0250 LAN B Transmitted Frames
0x0254 LAN B Frame Errors (CRC)
0x0258 LAN B Wrong LanID Errors
0x034C Interlink Received Frames
0x0350 Interlink Transmitted Frames
0x0354 Interlink Frame Errors (CRC)
0x0358 Interlink Wrong LanID Errors

Table 20: Ethernet Diagnostic Registers

63
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
You can send commands in the format S## <ENTER> A## <ENTER> R <ENTER>, where the values
following S are the two most significant hex address characters, the values following A are the two least
significant hex address characters, and R issues the read command.

The following example issues a command that reads the LAN A Received Frames counter at register
0x14C. User inputs are displayed in boldfaced text.

>S01
>
Ok!
>A4C
>
Ok!
>R
>
Ok!
Rd 0003A41B at 014C

Note: If Ok! is not received in response to a command, reissue the command.

64
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Dial-up Modem Port
The built-in modem is specified in NCD as port D. This port is optional and must be specified in the customer
order for its installation. If this option is installed in the OrionLX, an RJ11 will be present under the MODEM
designator. If this option is not installed, a metal blank will be installed. The modem option is not field-
upgradeable.

The connector is a standard modem RJ11 female connector. The modem is designed to connect directly
to a dial-up telephone line. It is fully compatible with the standard AT command set.

Figure 26: OrionLX Modem Connection and Blank

Modem Specifications

Maximum data rates

▪ V.92/56Kbps
▪ V.34/33.6Kbps

ECC support
▪ V.42 LAPM and MNP 2 - 4 error correction
▪ V.42bis and MNP 5 data compression

65
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
IRIG-B Port
The IRIG-B input is standard in the OrionLX. This input allows the OrionLX to stay synced with an IRIG-B
client (GPS clock) within 1 millisecond. Both modulated (AC) and demodulated (DC) IRIG-B inputs are
connected via a BNC male connector. Use the OrionLX Webpage to configure modulated or demodulated
IRIG-B inputs (see Settings/ System). The OrionLX accepts standard IRIG-B as well as the IEEE 1344
IRIG-B extensions that provide a two-digit year.

The time information can be passed on as demodulated time via RS-232 (A and E card), RS-485 (G card),
and V-Pin Fiber (H card) modules in slots 1-16.

Note: When using the RS-485 (-G card) and V-Pin fiber (-H card), the device on the other end must
use a matching NovaTech card.

A one pulse per second (1PPS) signal can be hard-wired into the OrionLX via a Phoenix-style connector
(see Figure 10 for location of connector). The 1PPS allows the OrionLX internal time to stay accurate even
if IRIG-B or NTP time synchronization is lost.

Figure 27: 1PPS and IRIG-B connections

Function 1PPS 1PPS

Terminal − +

Table 21: 1PPS Terminal Designators

The OrionLX IRIG-B port is calculated to have an estimated 500 Ohm impedance based on signal
impedance draw, using peak-peak signal values. For example, an IRIG-B source with a 5Vp-p signal would
be required to source 10mA of current per NovaTech device connected to the port. This calculated current
value of 500 Ohm includes allowances made for power losses at junctions, connectors, and along cables,
in addition to allowances for changes in system characteristics over the rated temperature range. In a
highly controlled environment, a time lock with quality within NovaTech’s minimum tolerances can be
achieved at half the calculated current.

For more information about the IRIG-B port specifications and functionality, refer to the section Isolated RS-
485 Serial Card with IRIG-B (Type –G) section.

66
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
OrionLX+ Rear Panel
The connections for Power, Alarm, Port B, ports P1 to P16, optional Orion Expansion Slot card, Ethernet,
USBs and IRIG-B are described below in the respective chapters.

Figure 28: OrionLX+ Rear Panel With NC1 Expansion Card

When the OrionLX+ is connected to power, touching the power

connectors on the outside of the OrionLX+ enclosure, or removing
the top cover of the OrionLX enclosure and touching the power
supply inside the enclosure, could result in injury or death. Proper
corporate and public safety instructions must be observed at all
times.

Power Connections
The OrionLX+ power input connectors are located at the left side of the rear panel. The OrionLX+ offers
two power options for the power supplies as well as support for an optional second (redundant) power
supply. The OrionLX+ uses removable screw terminal compression fittings for user power connections.
These connectors are keyed to the power supply location, Supply 1 (upper connector) or Supply 2 (lower
connector).

Figure 29: Power Connector Keying

Note: You may determine other keying conventions suitable for your organization.

Note: It is necessary that the connections to the power supply input terminal on the OrionLX+ be
externally fused. See OrionLX+ Fuse Replacement section for the appropriate fuse type.

67
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
The OrionLX+ offers several voltage options for “Supply 1” and the optional redundant power supply,
“Supply 2”. The OrionLX+ motherboard circuitry combines the output of these two power supplies into a
constant 5V dc which is required to operate the OrionLX+. The purpose of this feature is not only to provide
continued operation if one power supply fails, but also to connect the OrionLX+ to two different power
sources to allow continued operation when one power source is lost.

#10-18 AWG wire with a minimum rating of 70C is recommended. For wiring the power connector, strip the
insulation between 1/4” to 3/8”. The GND lug is a #8 stainless steel screw that is connected to the chassis,
and must be connected to Earth Ground. A size #8 ring or spade lug connector is recommended. NovaTech
recommends that all grounding be performed in accordance with ANSI/IEEE C57.13.3-1983.

USB Ports
The OrionLX+ is equipped with five USB A-type ports. USB 1 is located on the front panel (Figure 7) of the
OrionLX+ and there are four USB ports on the lower right hand side of the rear panel, two located under
each of the Ethernet connectors (ETH0 and ETH1). These ports can be used for approved peripheral
devices such as USB flash drives. If the Multimedia Card option (-MMC) is installed, the USB keyboard and
USB mouse can be connected to two of these ports.

IRIG-B Port
The IRIG-B input is standard in the OrionLX+. This input allows the OrionLX+ to stay synced with an IRIG-
B client (GPS clock) within 1 millisecond. Both modulated (AC) and demodulated (DC) IRIG-B inputs are
connected via a BNC male connector. Use the OrionLX+ Webpage to configure modulated or demodulated
IRIG-B inputs (see Settings/ System). The OrionLX accepts standard IRIG-B as well as the IEEE 1344
IRIG-B extensions that provide a two-digit year.

The time information can be passed on as demodulated time via RS-232 (A and E card), RS-485 (G card),
and V-Pin Fiber (H card) modules in slots 1-16.

Note: When using the RS-485 (-G card) and V-Pin fiber (-H card), the device on the other end must
use a matching NovaTech card.

Alarm Output
The OrionLX+ has a form C alarm output connector for using either NC or NO dry contact alarm indicator
output.

OrionLX+ Expansion Slot

The OrionLX+ supports additional port and network flexibility by installing optional NovaCards that support
the additional capabilities. Currently supported NovaCards:

NovaCard #0 (NC0)

▪ 4 digital input points, low or high voltage range

▪ 4 digital output points (2 form A, 2 form C)
▪ 1 RJ45 Ethernet port (ETH2)

68
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

Figure 30: NovaCard #0

For description of the points, see NC0 and NC1 Card Digital Inputs and NC0 and NC1 Card Digital Outputs.

NovaCard #1 (NC1)

▪ 4 digital input points, low or high voltage range

▪ 4 digital output points (2 form A, 2 form C)
▪ 1 RJ45 Ethernet port (ETH2)
▪ 2 SFP Ethernet ports (ETH3, ETH4)

Figure 31: NovaCard #1

NC0 and NC1 Card Digital Inputs

The NC0 and NC1 expansion cards for the OrionLX+ have four digital input points. The digital inputs are
factory set to either 12-48V dc (low voltage/LV) or 120-250V dc (high voltage/HV) as indicated by the
checkbox positioned over the input connector. The input circuitry provides 1000 V channel-to-channel
isolation. Inputs can be time stamped to 1ms when the OrionLX+ is receiving quality time synchronization.

Figure 32: NC0 and NC1 Digital Inputs and Status LEDs

Input Point In4 In3 In2 In1

Polarity + – + – + – + –
Terminal 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11

Table 22: Digital Input Terminal Pinout

The voltage of the digital inputs can be changed by removing the NovaCard from the enclosure (see also
Opening the OrionLX+ Enclosure) and changing the jumper settings as follows.

69
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Step 1: After removing the NovaCard from the enclosure, locate the jumpers JP1 – JP4 near the center of
the board as shown in the following figure.

Figure 33: NC0 and NC1 Jumpers

Step 2: Set the jumpers to the desired low voltage or high voltage position according to the following table.
The four jumpers can be set independently of each other, meaning some jumpers can be set to low
voltage and others can be set to high voltage.

Range Set jumper across pins Input voltage range Turn on voltage
Low voltage 1 and 2 12-48V dc ~ 10V dc
High voltage 2 and 3 125-250V dc ~ 90V dc

Table 23: NovaCard Input Voltage Ranges

Step 3: Once the jumpers are in the desired positions, gently insert the card into the slot in the OrionLX+.
Turn the screws clockwise till they are tight.

NC0 and NC1 Card Digital Outputs

The NC0 and NC1 cards for the OrionLX+ have four digital output points. All digital outputs are relay dry
contacts. Out3 and Out4 are form A normally open (NO) outputs. Out1 and Out2 are form C and can be
wired as normally open (NO) or normally closed (NC).

Figure 34: NC0 and NC1 Digital Outputs and Status LEDs

70
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Output
Out4 Out3 Out2 Out1
Point
State NO NO NC pole NO NC pole NO
Terminal 28 27 26 25 24B 24 23 22B 22 21

Table 24: Digital Outputs Pinout

NovaCard #2 (NC2)

The NovaCard #2 provides a 12 port unmanaged switch with RJ45 ports which can be set up with a single
NIC or multiple NICs in the OrionLX+.

Figure 35: NovaCard #2

NovaCard #3 (NC3)

▪ 4 digital input points, low or high voltage range

▪ 2 digital output points (1 form A, 1 form C)
▪ 1 pair of PRP/HSR ports for LAN A and LAN B. Connection to each LAN can be made with either an
RJ45 port or an SFP port.
▪ 1 RJ45 Ethernet port
▪ 1 SFP port

NC3 Card Digital Inputs

The NC3 expansion card for the OrionLX+ has group of four digital input points. The digital inputs are
factory set to either 12-48V dc or 120-250V dc as indicated by the checkbox positioned over the input
connector. The input circuitry provides 300 V channel-to-channel isolation. Inputs can be time stamped to
1ms when the OrionLX+ is receiving quality time synchronization.

71
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

Figure 36: NC3 Digital Inputs and Status LEDs

Input Point In1 In2 In3 In4 Com

Polarity + + + + -
Terminal 12 14 16 18 11

Table 25: Digital Input Terminal Pinout

The voltage of the digital inputs can be changed by removing the NovaCard from the enclosure (see also
Opening the OrionLX+ Enclosure) and changing the jumper settings as follows.

Step 1: After removing the NovaCard from the enclosure, locate the jumpers JP401A (for input 1) through
JP401D (for input 4) behind the Phoenix connector on the board as shown in the following figure.

Figure 37: NC3 Jumpers

Step 2: Set the jumpers to the desired low voltage or high voltage position according LOW or HIGH marker
on the right side of Figure 37. The four jumpers can be set independently of each other, meaning
some jumpers can be set to low voltage and others can be set to high voltage.

Step 3: Once the jumpers are in the desired positions, gently insert the card into the slot in the OrionLX+.
Turn the screws clockwise till they are tight.

NC3 Card Digital Outputs

The NC3 card for the OrionLX+ has two digital output points (see Figure 36). All digital outputs are relay
dry contacts. Out1 is a form A normally open (NO) output. Out2 is a form C output that can be wired as
normally open (NO) or normally closed (NC).

72
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Output
Out1 Out2
Point
State NO NC Pole NO
Terminal 21 22 24B 24 23

Table 26: Digital Outputs Pinout

Port B
Port B is an option card slot in the OrionLX+. The Port B card slot can be configured with any of the standard
serial cards listed in Port 1-16 Card Options below.

73
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Port 1-16 Card Options
Port 1-16 are optional serial interface ports for the OrionLX and OrionLX+ and can consist of any
combination of the following module types:

▪ RS-232 Serial Card (Standard/Type –A and Isolated/Type –E Version)

▪ Isolated RS-485/422 Serial Card (Type –B)
▪ ST Fiber Serial Card (Type –C)
▪ Isolated Bit Protocol Card (Type –D)
▪ Isolated RS-485 Serial Card with IRIG-B (Type –G)
▪ V-Pin HCS Fiber Serial Card (Type –H)

Each module is followed by its part number. The part number is always post-fixed with nn, where nn is the
number of modules of this type in the OrionLX or OrionLX+, for a maximum of 16 modules. For example,
–A11 –D02 –G03 indicates eleven standard RS-232 modules, two bit cards, and three RS-485 modules
with IRIG-B.

RS-232 Serial Card (Standard/Type –A and Isolated/Type –E Version)

RS-232 communications cards are available in a standard version (type –A) and in an isolated version (type
–E). The following descriptions apply to both cards. The only exception is jumper H1 which is available
only on the type –A card.

Figure 38: Standard RS-232 Communication Card (Type –A)

74
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

Figure 39: Isolated RS-232 Communication Card (Type –E)

Jumpers JP2 and JP3 configure the type –A/–E card to

▪ operate in standard RS-232 mode or
▪ provide the following additional pinouts for connecting SEL® relays and devices
- IRIG-B time code signal with TTL level on pin 4, and associated ground on pin 6 (JP3)
- +5V dc @ 100mA on pin 1 (JP2)

The pinout of the both cards is described in the following table.

Standard RS-232 with Additional

RS-232 Mode Pinouts
DB9 Definition
JP2 Off JP2 Off JP2 On
JP3 Off JP3 On JP3 On
1 N/A N/A +5V dc Fused at 100 mA
2 RxD RxD RxD Receive Data
3 TxD TxD TxD Transmit Data
4 N/A IRIG-B IRIG-B TTL Time Signal
5 GND GND GND Signal Ground
6 N/A GND GND Signal Ground for IRIG-B
7 RTS RTS RTS Request to Send
8 CTS CTS CTS Clear to Send
9 RI RI RI Ring Indicator
Table 27: RS-232 Serial Card Pinout (Type –A and Type –E)

Note: DTR, DSR, and DCD are not available on the type –A or the type –E card.

75
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
The RS-232 communication card is shipped with the jumpers JP2 and JP3 in the Off
position (R-S232 mode). If JP2 and JP3 are changed from their default position, and
the card is later connected to other third-party devices that operate in RS-232 mode,
damage to the devices and/or the OrionLX card may occur. Return jumpers JP2 and
JP3 to the Off position before connecting to devices that require standard RS-232
communication.

The default setting as shipped by NovaTech is shown in Figure 40.

Figure 40: Standard RS-232 Mode (Default)

When an SEL relay or device is connected to the RS-232 card, JP2 and JP3 can be set as follows to
accommodate the SEL requirements. JP3 sets up the RS-232 port to provide an unmodulated TTL-level
IRIG-B (0-5V DC) on pin 4, with the corresponding ground on pin 6 of the RS-232 port.

Note: JP3 has either three or six pins, which are jumpered with one jumper (Table 28) or two
jumpers (Table 29), depending on the version of the RS-232 card.

Jumper Position RS-232 Pinout Pins 4 and 6

JP3 1-2 Pins 4 and 6 unused (Default)
2-3 IRIG-B on pins 4 and 6

Table 28: IRIG-B Jumper Setting (Single Jumper)

Jumper Position RS-232 Pinout Pins 4 and 6

JP3 1-3 Pins 4 and 6 unused (Default)
2-4
3-5 IRIG-B on pins 4 and 6 of RS-
4-6 232 port

Table 29: IRIG-B Jumper Setting (Double Jumper)

Additional information about IRIG-B is provided in chapter NKI – Time Interface.

JP2 sets up the card to provide +5V @ 100mA on pin 1. Some SEL® devices are powered through pin 1.

Note: If a device which pulls more than 100mA is connected to pin 1 (+5V), or if a short occurs,
the OrionLX with Video may not be able to boot.

Pin 1 has an internal solid-state fuse for protection. If a short circuit has occurred, remove the power
connector for approximately 15 seconds to reset. If this condition persists, examine the external circuitry
for shorts.

76
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
The OrionLX provides enough power for setting up all 16 ports with +5V @ 100mA on pin 1.

Jumper Position RS-232 Pinout Pin 1

JP2 1-2 Pin 1 unused (Default)
2-3 +5V @ 100mA on pin 1

Table 30: +5V Jumper Setting

Jumper H1 is available only on the type –A card.

Jumper Position Description

H1 1-2 Factory default position which
must not be changed. This
applies only to card type –A.

Table 31: H1 Jumper (Type –A only)

77
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Isolated RS-485/422 Serial Card (Type –B)1
The RS-485/422 signals are brought out on a Phoenix screw terminal. The RS-485/422 card can be
jumpered for three different modes.
▪ 2-wire (default setting)
▪ 4-wire full-duplex
▪ 4-wire half-duplex

Pin 1

Pin 5

Figure 41: Isolated RS-485/422 Serial Card (Type –B)

The communication mode is set up by jumpers JP4 and JP5 as shown in the following table.

Communication Jumper Position Position on Card

2-wire RS-485 JP4 2-3
(default setting) JP5 1-3
2-4

4-wire full-duplex RS-422 JP4 1-2

JP5 3-5
4-6

4-wire half-duplex RS-422 JP4 2-3

JP5 3-5
4-6

Table 32: RS-485/22 Selection Jumpers

1For additional RS-485/422 setup information, see also NovaTech’s RS-485/422 Communication Setup
Technical Note.

78
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
The following tables describe the pinout of the card connector for each of the communication modes.

Phoenix Signal
1 (Top) Tx/Rx-
2 Tx/Rx+
5 (Bottom) Ground

Table 33: Pinout for RS-485 Communication

Phoenix Signal Definition

1 (Top) Tx-/Tx(A) Transmit Data
2 Tx+/Tx(B) Transmit Data
3 Rx-/Rx(A) Receive Data
4 Rx+/Rx(B) Receive Data
5 (Bottom) GND Signal Ground

Table 34: Pinout for RS-422 Communication

Jumpers JP6 and JP3 enable the termination resistor for the Receive line and the Transmit line,
respectively. The default setting is Termination Resistor Disabled/Off. The termination resistor is 120 Ohm.

RS-422/485 120 Ohm Jumper Position Position on Card

Termination Resistor
Disabled (default setting) JP3 1-2
JP6 1-2

Enabled JP3 2-3

JP6 2-3

Table 35: Termination Resistor Jumper Settings

This module provides 200mV biasing voltage internally.

Note: For correct line impedance and for EMI protection, use twisted pair wiring for each
signal. Shielded twisted pair is recommended for cables which are installed in electrically
noisy environments.

79
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
ST Fiber Serial Card (Type –C)
The ST Fiber card can be set up for multi-drop communications and point-to-point communications. The
default setting is Off (point-to-point communications).

This card supports 800-850nm wavelengths using multimode fiber. The transmit power and receiver
sensitivity depend on the installed fiber as shown in the following table.

Fiber Optical Power Budget

50/125µm 4.2dB
62.5/125µm 8.0dB
100/140µm 8.0dB
200µm 12.0dB

Table 36: ST Fiber Transmit Power and Receiver Sensitivity

Transmitter

Receiver

Figure 42: ST Fiber Communication Card (–C)

Jumper JP2 determines the communication mode as shown in the following table.

80
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Jumper Communication Position Echo Position on Card
Mode
JP2 Point-to-point 1-2 Off
communication (default)

Multi-drop ring 2-3 On

configuration

Table 37: ST Fiber Communication Mode Jumper

81
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Isolated Bit Protocol Card (Type –D)
The Bit Protocol card handles bit-oriented protocols to provide support for legacy protocols. The logic levels
match RS-232 levels. The message framing is unique to the specific bit protocol. The specific bit protocol
firmware is stored on each card.

Figure 43: Isolated Bit Protocol Card (Type – D)

The connector JP2 is used by the factory for loading protocol-specific firmware into the card.

The jumper JP3 can invert the receiver line depending on the specific protocol requirements. If this jumper
is required, the settings are described in the associated bit protocol manual by NovaTech.

Pin 1

Receive LED Transmit LED

Figure 44: Isolated Bit Protocol Card Front View

82
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
The bit protocol card has the following pinout.

RJ45 Female Signal Definition

3 TXD Transmit Data
4 RXD Receive Data
5 GND Signal Ground
6 RTS Request to Send
7 CTS Clear to Send
8 GND (Chassis) Chassis Ground

Table 38: Isolated Bit Protocol Card Pinout

Note: For EMI protection, use shielded cable or twisted pair wiring for cable lengths of more than
1 meter.

83
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Isolated RS-485 Serial Card with IRIG-B (Type –G)2
In addition to RS-485 communication, this card transmits/receives the IRIG-B signal on an RS-485 level to
allow IRIG-B synchronization between multiple Orions all using the same –G module. The RS-485 card
with IRIG-B can act as either an IRIG-B client or as an IRIG-B server, depending on the jumper settings.

Note: IRIG-B communication with this card is not compatible with standard IRIG-B, which uses
TTL between devices.

Pin 1

Pin 6

Figure 45: Isolated RS-485 Communication Card with IRIG-B (-G)

Jumper H1 (in the center of the card) is set at the factory to IRIG-B source (position 1-2) which is the
standard for most applications. Position 2-3 is IRIG-B recipient which is used when the Orion is
synchronized by another Orion running this card in the source setup.

Jumper Position Description

H1 1-2 The card acts as IRIG-B source and distributes the IRIG-B signal through
pins 4, 5, and 6.
2-3 The card acts as IRIG-B recipient. It receives IRIG-B time through pins
4, 5, and 6. In this setup, the connector J1 of the RS-485 card is
connected to the Orion’s IRIG-B card (in place of the BNC connector’s
cable to the IRIG-B card). This connectivity allows multiple Orions in a
location to be synchronized to the same IRIG-B time, with one Orion
being the IRIG-B client, and the others being IRIG-B servers.

Table 39: IRIG-B Jumper Setting

Jumpers JP1 and JP4 at the top of the card (Figure 46) enable the termination resistor (120 Ohm) for the
Data line and the IRIG-B line, respectively. The jumper settings are shown in Table 40.

2 For additional RS-485 setup information, see NovaTech’s Tech Note RS-485/422 Communication Setup.

84
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

Figure 46: Termination Resistor Jumpers

Jumper Purpose 120 Ohm Termination 120 Ohm Termination

Resistor Disabled Resistor Enabled
JP1 Data 1-2 2-3
JP4 IRIG-B 1-2 2-3

Table 40: Termination Resistor Jumper Settings

The RS-485 and IRIG-B signals are brought out on JP2 which is a Phoenix screw terminal with pinout as
shown in Table 41.

Phoenix Signal Definition

1 (Top) TX/RX- Transmit and Receive Data
2 TX/RX+ Transmit and Receive Data
3 GND Signal Ground for Data
4 TX/RX- Transmit or Receive IRIG-B
5 TX/RX+ Transmit or Receive IRIG-B
6 (Bottom) GND Signal Ground for IRIG-B

Table 41: RS-485 with IRIG-B Pinout

This module provides 200mV biasing voltage internally.

Note: For correct line impedance and for EMI protection, use twisted pair wiring for each
signal. Shielded twisted pair is recommended for cables which are installed in electrically
noisy environments.

85
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
V-Pin HCS Fiber Serial Card (Type –H)
The V-Pin Fiber with IRIG-B card offers data and IRIG-B communication in multi-drop and point-to-point/star
configurations. This card supports 660nm wavelengths using HCS fiber at 9dB optical power budget with
direct IRIG-B input.

Tx Data

Rx Data

Tx IRIG-B

Figure 47: V-Pin HCS Fiber Serial Card (Type –H)

The default jumper setting is for point-to-point communications. For multi-drop ring configurations, set the
Echo jumper JP1 to 2-3 as shown in Table 42.

Jumper Communication Mode Position Echo

JP1 Point-to-point (default) 1-2 Off
Multi-drop ring 2-3 On

Table 42: JP1 Settings for Echo On/Off

86
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
OrionLX/OrionLX+ Dimensioned Drawings
The following drawings provide the dimensions of the OrionLX and OrionLX+ rackmount enclosure.

PANEL CUTOUT

Figure 48: OrionLX/OriopnLX+ Overall Dimensions and Panel Cutout

87
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Mounting Instructions
To rack mount the OrionLX or OrionLX+, use #10 (10-32) screws and attach the device to the rack in the
four places indicated below. The OrionLX or OrionLX+ must be mounted in an enclosure that exposes only
the front panel to personnel when in operation. Exposing the top, bottom, sides and rear of the Orion while
in operation will void safety standards defined in UL 61010-1.

Ensure that the OrionLXm is mounted in compliance with all applicable

safety requirements.

Figure 49: Mounted OrionLX+

An enclosure or cabinet, which is utilized for panel mounting the OrionLX or OrionLX+ chassis, should be
sized to allow for adequate clearance around the exterior of the chassis (i.e., the rear panel, sides, top,
bottom, and front handles). When selecting an enclosure consider one that offers adequate impact
resistance and rigidity. It is important that adequate clearance behind the rear panel be maintained to
accommodate hazardous connections, connectors, and the dressing of wiring. Wiring should be dressed in
a manner that allows room for plugging and unplugging during installation and servicing.

Follow best engineering practices when routing wires. It is recommended that power connections be
separated from communication signals. It is also recommended that wiring and cabling be anchored and
secured in place to guard against potential issues that can result from shock and vibration.

Cleaning

Cleaning the exterior of the Orion shall be limited to the wiping of the unit using a soft damp cloth
applicator with cleaning agents that are not alcohol based, non-flammable, and non-explosive.

88
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
OrionLX Fuse Replacement
On the OrionLX, power supply fuses and surge board fuses can be replaced as follows.

Removing the top cover of the Orion exposes the technician to live
voltage. Proper care must be taken by either removing the power to the
Orion prior to removing the top cover, or by using proper equipment
and tools to protect against electric shock. Failure to do so could result
in equipment damage, injury, and/or death.

When removing a cover from the Orion, observe precautions for

handling electrostatic sensitive devices.

The power supply fuses are accessible by removing the top cover of the OrionLX.

Replacing Power Supply Surge Board Fuses

The fuses of the power supply surge board (board number 750-106) depend on the input voltages of the
OrionLX power supplies. The surge board is located inside the OrionLX enclosure at the power supply
connectors (see Figure 10 and Figure 11) and shown in the following figures.

Figure 50: Power Supply Board Fuses, Board Revisions B-D

Fusing is available starting at revision B of the power supply board (750-106). The 5x20mm fuses must be
installed as shown in Figure 50.

89
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

Figure 51: Power Supply Board Fuse, Board Revision F and Newer

Board revisions F (Figure 51) and newer require the Cooper-Bussmann SS-5H series fuses. Contact
orion.support@novatechautomation.com for replacement fuse details.

Select the correct replacement fuse depending on the power supply voltage as follows.

OrionLX Power Fuse Size Fuse Fuse Fuse Blow Board

Supply Voltage Voltage Amperage Characteristic Revision
12V dc 5x20mm glass 250V 3.15A Slow n/a
tube
24V dc 5x20mm glass 250V 2.0A Slow n/a
tube
48-125V dc, 120V 5x20mm glass 250V 4.0A Slow B, C, D
ac tube
48-125V dc, 120V Cooper-Bussman 300V 4.0A Slow F
ac SS-5H series

Table 43: Surge Board Fuses

Note: Different fuses are needed if two different power supplies are installed in the OrionLX.

90
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
OrionLX+ Fuse Replacement
The OrionLX+ must be protected with an external fuse for each power supply since it does not have internal
fuses. Fuses shall be enclosed in an appropriate fuse holder to prevent the possibility of a fuse shattering.
The fuse and fuse holder must carry a voltage rating that is appropriate for the power system being used.

Replacing the external fuse of the OrionLX+ exposes the technician to

live voltage. Proper care must be taken by either removing the power
to the OrionLX+ prior to fuse replacement, or by using proper
equipment and tools to protect against electric shock. Failure to do so
could result in equipment damage, injury, and/or death.

OrionLX+ Power Fuse Size Fuse Voltage Fuse Amperage Fuse Blow
Supply Voltage Characteristic
100 – 240V ac 5x20mm glass 250V 3.5A Slow
tube
100 – 250V dc, Schurter SPT 250V ac 3.15A Slow
100 – 240V ac 5x20mm 300V dc
Order #
0001.2509
100 – 250V dc, 5x20 ceramic 250V ac 3.15A Slow
100 – 240V ac tube 300V dc

Table 44: OrionLX+ External Fuses for Power Input

Note: Different fuses are needed if two different power supplies are installed in the OrionLX+.

91
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

III.NovaTech Configuration Director (NCD)

Introduction to NovaTech Configuration Director

NCD is Windows®-based configuration software with a practical and straightforward graphical user interface
(GUI) that does not require special programming or scripting. NCD is available for download at
www.novatech-llc.com/support. This requires an account which you may obtain from
orion.support@novatechautomation.com. Communications are easily set up between the Orion and
protocol clients, Human Machine Interfaces (HMI), Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC), or Intelligent
Electronic Devices (IED) such as relays and meters. For many server devices (i.e. devices being polled by
the Orion), default files are available that contain the device’s standard input and output points with name,
point address, and range. This further facilitates fast setup of the Orion.

NCD is used to set up the following features of an OrionLX configuration. The setup of other features not
listed here is described in section Orion Webpage.

▪ Hardware model and options selection

▪ Serial and network port setup
▪ Input/output point lists for each client and server port
▪ Allow forcing of input/output points for commissioning and troubleshooting
▪ Add-on features:
- Alarm/Archive/Retentive
- Alias
- Average Archive
- Configuration Manager Agent
- Data Logger
- Orion Redundancy
- Points Blocking
- Pseudo Client
- Pusher Server
- Hardware Sensor
- System Logger
- Text Module
▪ Input/output hardware
▪ Logic
- Math & Logic
- Advanced Math & Logic
- LogicPak
- DA
- IEC 61131-3

Once the Orion’s configuration has been created off-line and saved to the respective files (.ncd, .ncz, .lua,
.bas), the respective files must be transferred from the PC to the Orion in one of the following ways:

▪ Serial, USB, or SSH connection between the PC running NCD and the Orion. Option File Transfer
(PC -> ORION) of the Orion’s MMI transfers the configuration file(s) to the Orion.
▪ Ethernet connection between the PC running NCD and the Orion. After logging in on the webpage,
the configuration files can be transferred to the Orion as described in User Files.
▪ One Click Transfer option from the NCD window using an SSH connection between the PC
and the Orion as described in the Quick Access Toolbar section.

In addition to the configuration options, NCD provides a built-in terminal window for viewing of data values,
port communications, device statistics, system events, and system/version information. It also allows

92
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
firmware file and log file transfers via Z-Modem (bi-directional), as well as pass-through to connected relays
and meters. This allows using the respective manufacturer’s programming software to configure the relays
and meters, retrieve event information, etc. Section Orion MMI provides a full explanation of these features.

System Requirements
The PC running NCD must meet the following requirements:
▪ > 100MB hard drive space
▪ Windows 8®, Windows 10®, or Windows 11®
▪ .NET 4.0
▪ Mouse
▪ Graphics resolution 1024x768 or better
▪ CD/DVD Drive (when using the optional NCD installation CD)
▪ Serial port or USB port
▪ Ethernet port

Copyright Information
NCD may be installed on multiple computers as needed under the following conditions:

▪ The computers must be owned by the end user or its subsidiary.

▪ The NCD installation must be used for an Orion-related project.

All files installed by NCD are protected by copyright and may not be shared with any third party. By installing
NCD on a computer, the installer agrees to these terms and conditions.

Outline of NCD Chapters

The chapter, Installation of NCD, has the step by step procedure to install NCD from the downloaded .zip
software file. This chapter also describes the associated files that are installed and their location in the
computers file directory.

Chapter Running NCD explains how the various OrionLX options are configured from within NCD. The
respective protocol and software manuals that pertain to the installed options must be available for setup.
For example, if the DNP3 Client over TCP/IP was ordered with the Orion, the corresponding DNP3 Client
Software Manual explains the DNP3-specific parameters, such as RTU addresses, point types,
communication parameters, etc.

All manuals are installed as .pdf files on the PC’s hard drive during the installation process described in the
chapter, Installation of NCD. Once the installation has been completed, the manual can be opened as
follows:

▪ In NCD, select Help -> Documentation.

▪ Windows 8® or Windows 10®: Press the Windows key to get to the Start Menu, then go to NovaTech
NCD3 -> NCD Documentation.

93
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

Figure 52: NovaTech Orion Documentation Location

94
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Installation of NCD
There are two NCD installation methods available.
▪ Standard NCD Install is most commonly used and requires user response while installing NCD
software, USB serial port drivers, and optional Inkscape software.
▪ Passive NCD Install is used by IT professionals and runs from the command line or scripts to install
NCD software only. The USB drivers and Inkscape software must be installed with a separate
command.

Standard NCD Installation

The standard NCD installation will install the NovaTech Configuration Director software and user interface
but it will also install several other file sets that will be used to support the configuration and operation of
the OrionLX. See Table 45 for a listing of the other directories and the file types that will be installed with
NCD.

Note: Antivirus software running on the PC may cause some NCD software files to not be installed.
To avoid this possibility, either disable the antivirus software during NCD installation,
approximately 10 minutes, or have the IT department “white list” or approve the NovaTech
NCD software if temporary disabling is not possible.

NCD is installed on a PC as follows:

▪ Unzip the downloaded .zip file with NCD to a directory on the PC. In that directory, run the file setup.exe.
▪ If installing from the NCD installation CD, insert the CD into the PC’s CD drive. If the PC is set up to
autorun, the NCD installation will start automatically. If the installation does not start automatically, then
open a command prompt and Type x:\setup.exe where x is the name of the CD drive (E:, F:, etc.).

To complete the installation, the PC must be restarted. When the PC has completed the restart, NCD3 can
be opened. See Running NCD for an explanation of NCD’s function in configuring the Orion for operation.

Passive NCD Installation

To facilitate the installation of NCD from the command line or a script, the NCD Passive installation can be
used. The NCD Passive install is run from a command line input and does not require user response during
the NCD installation process.

Note: The passive install does not install the Inkscape Extension during the NCD installation. This
will need to be installed separately on the machines.

From the root directory on the NCD installation disk, with administrative rights, input either:
▪ setup -passiveinstall This will install to the default file locations
▪ setup -passiveinstall “C:\[user defined directory]”

To install the Inkscape Extension, from the root directory on the NCD installation disk run with administrative
rights:

OrionInkscapeExtension /S

95
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
NCD Default File Information

NCD and accompanying files are installed in the following directories as shown in Figure 53.

C:/Program Files(x86)/NovaTech LLC/NCD3/

Figure 53: NCD Program Directory Structure

Directory Description
\Defaults Default files for IEDs and relays supported by the Orion. New default files can
be added as needed and described by each respective protocol manual. The
default files are .csv (comma separated value) files.
\Docs All current released documentation regarding the following: Orion, software,
protocols, and Technical Notes.
\HMI Library Library collection of .svg graphic images of equipment faceplates, control panel
elements, substation symbols and other elements to be used in the one-line
diagrams.
\LogicSimulator LogicSimulator.exe allows running the logic program on the PC to check
it for errors before transferring it to the Orion.
\USB Driver The USB driver for communication between the PC and the Orion via USB
OrionLX cable.
OrionLXm
\HWDEF Internal software directories.
\IEC61131-3
\Protocols

Table 45: NCD Program Directory Structure

96
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
The NCD configuration files, user-defined connection settings, and user-defined default files are stored by
default under \My Documents\NCD\ as shown below. Of course, other directories can be set up as
needed for storing these files.

Figure 54: NCD Data Directory Structure

Directory Description
\Captures By default, any files with MMI captures are stored in this directory. These files
can also be stored elsewhere on the PC if desired. See chapter User Settings
- Capture Tab for details.
\Connections User-defined .conn files for the NCD connections with the Orion.
\NCDFiles Orion .ncd configuration files and associated .bas or .lua logic files.
\UserDefaultFiles User-defined default files for IEDs, relays, and SNMP configurations. New
default files can be added as needed and described by each respective
protocol manual. The default files must be .csv (comma separated value)
files.
\UserMIBFiles Management Information Base (.mib) files for the devices monitored by the
SNMP Manager.
\UserSCLFiles Any .scl, .icd, or .cid files imported by the user in the IEC 61850 driver are
stored in this directory. See the IEC 61850 Client Software Manual for more
details.

Table 46: NCD Data Directory Structure

97
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Running NCD
NCD3 can be started in different ways such as the following:

▪ On the desktop, double click the NCD3 shortcut icon.

▪ Press the Windows key to get to the Start Menu, then go to NovaTech NCD3 -> NCD3.
▪ Use the file path C:\Program Files (x86)\NovaTech LLC\NCD3\NCD3.exe

Opening NCD3 will display the NCD opening screen and main menu

NCD Main Menu

The main menu of NCD provides the options listed in Table 47. A more in-depth description, including all
sub-options, is found in the following chapters.

Multiple Orion configurations can be opened and edited simultaneously.

Figure 55: NCD Main Menu

98
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Menu Bar Description
File Access to .ncd file-related options, such as New, Open, Close, Save, Save As,
and recently edited files. Each .ncd file contains a single configuration for an Orion.
Multiple .ncd files can be transferred to the Orion, but the Orion can run only one
configuration at any given time. See File Menu for a full explanation of all file-
related options.
Edit The automatic login data to the Orion Support Site, NCD Update Options, settings
to enable logging of events and errors, changing default file locations, and setting
capture file parameters are all accessed with this menu option. See Edit Menu for
a full explanation of all edit related options.
Configure The entire Orion configuration is set up from this option, including hardware
configuration and options, software, port configurations, addresses, IP addresses,
input/output point lists, poll rates, etc. See Configure Menu for all configuration-
related options.
Note: The Configure menu selection is only available when a .ncd file is
open.
Communications This option connects the PC to the Orion’s MMI. The Orion’s MMI can be accessed
with both NCD and standard terminal software, such as WinTerminal, CRT, etc.
The Orion’s MMI is fully explained in the Orion MMI chapter.
Window If multiple windows are open in NCD, this option allows arranging the windows
vertically or horizontally, or cascading of the windows.
Help This option provides the standard About information, as well as Protocol Info
which summarizes the current configuration. See Help Menu for a full explanation
of all help related options.
Table 47: NCD Main Menu

Quick Access Toolbar

Below the main menu is the Quick Access Toolbar (Figure 56) which provides one click access to some of
the most used commands.

Figure 56: Quick Access Toolbar

See Table 48 for the descriptions of these icons.

Toolbar Icon Menu Command Description

File -> New Starts the configuration for a new .ncd file by first
specifying the hardware that will support this
New NCD file.
File -> Open Open an existing .ncd file.

Open

99
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Toolbar Icon Menu Command Description
File -> Save All Saves all .ncd files currently open.
Save File(s)
Communications -> Opens Manage Connections command menu
Online Connections to manage the Online maintenance connections
Connections from the PC to the OrionLX.
Configure Orion One Click Transfer. When only
one NCD file is open and the hardware model is
OrionLX+, OrionLX, OrionLXm, OrionMX or
Orion I/O, you can setup a connection between
Configure NCD and the Orion to transfer the NCD and logic
Orion One (none)
files to the Orion and automatically activate the
Click file set. One Click configuration requires the user
Transfer to select an SSH connection from the
Communications menu and the
username/password for the Orion.
The Orion One Click Transfer icon will be active
(none) once the One Click Configuration parameters
One Click
have been entered.
Transfer
Help -> About This provides the standard About information for
the NovaTech NCD software.
About

Table 48: Quick Access Toolbar Description

100
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
File Menu
This option handles the .ncd files which contain the Orion configuration.

Figure 57: File Menu

See Table 49 for a description of the File menu options.

Command Description
New Starts the configuration for a new .ncd file by first specifying the hardware that will
support this NCD file. This configuration will later be saved with Save or Save As.
When creating a new configuration, the Select Hardware window (see Figure
58) will be displayed. Select Cascaded NCD File if this Orion is the Cascading
Client of a cascaded configuration. When using cascaded Orion, refer to
Cascading Software Manual as well as the chapter Cascaded Orions. After
selecting the Orion hardware, the next step is the Configure Menu.
Open Opens an existing .ncd file. The installed default directory location is,
C:\My Documents\NCD\NCDFiles\. However, the .ncd file and the associated
.bas, .lua, and/or .ncz files can be stored anywhere on the PC.
Save All If multiple .ncd files are open, this option is enabled for saving all open files at the
same time.

101
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Command Description
Save Saves the current Orion configuration to the corresponding .ncd file (and associated
.bas file for Math & Logic, .lua file for Advanced Math & Logic, .ncz for IEC 61850
and IEC 61131) already on the hard drive. If this is the first time that this
configuration is saved to file, a Save As window will appear. If multiple
configurations are open, the configuration to be saved must be selected (see Figure
59).
Save As Saves the current Orion configuration to a new .ncd file (and associated .bas file if
Math & Logic is used or .lua file if Advanced Math & Logic is used). The new file
name must be entered. If multiple configurations are open, the configuration to be
saved must be selected (see Figure 59).
Close Closes the open Orion configuration file. If there are unsaved changes to the file, a
Confirm dialog box will open with options to save the changes before closing. If
multiple configurations are open, the configuration to be closed must be selected
(see Figure 59).
Page/Printer Provides the fields to setup printer paper size and source, orientation and margins
Setup for the selected .ncd file that is to be printed.
Print Preview Opens a Print Preview window displaying the selected .ncd files data in the format
that was specified.
Print Opens a Print window that allows for printer selection, page range to print and
number of copies to print for the selected .ncd file.
Convert There are several conversion operations available as shown in Figure 60.
▪ NCD file from Orion5r to OrionLX converts an .ncd file which has
originally been set up for an Orion5r to an OrionLX. Specifically, the Orion5r
supports Modbus Plus while the OrionLX supports Modbus TCP. If the existing
OrionLX configuration includes Modbus Plus, this function converts all related
configuration information to Modbus TCP.
▪ NCD file from OrionLX to OrionLX+ converts an existing .ncd file which
has been set up for an OrionLX to an OrionLX+ .ncd file. The conversion sets
the NovaCard type to NC1, removes Power Supply 1 and Power Supply
2 Status points from the SER Client and adds Power Supply 1 and Power
Supply 2 online points to the Sensor Client.
▪ NCD file from Standard to Cascaded Client converts an existing
.ncd file which has originally been set up for a stand-alone Orion into a new .ncd
file for the client Orion of several cascaded Orions.
▪ NCD file from Standard to Cascaded Server converts an existing
.ncd file which has originally been set up for a stand-alone Orion, and makes it
part of an existing cascaded .ncd file.
▪ Math and Logic to Advanced Math and Logic converts .bas logic to
.lua logic. The Orion supports both logic types; however using Advanced Math
& Logic offers more user flexibility and options. This conversion tool will convert
both the .bas to .lua as well as update any references in the .ncd file from .bas
to .lua.
Show This option compares two NCD files. The result of the comparison is displayed in
Differences a window and can be copied to the clipboard or saved to a file for detailed analysis.
Relay Helper The Relay Helper supports configuration for SEL® relays and is described in
the SEL® Client Software Manual, Appendix G.

102
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Command Description
Reorder This function opens an existing .ncd file for reordering the network ports. Then the
Network Ports network ports can be rearranged by clicking
in NCD File the Move Up and Move Down buttons as shown in Figure 61.
IEC 61850 This option is used to create an SCL file that models and configures logical devices,
Model Builder logical nodes, data objects, and data attributes to the specifications required by IEC
61850 standards.
Exit Exits NCD. If the current configuration has not yet been saved to an .ncd file, an
additional prompt allows saving the file before exiting.

Table 49: NCD File Menu

Figure 58: Select Hardware

Figure 59: Selecting Configuration for Save, Save As, Close

Figure 60: Convert Operations

103
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

Figure 61: Reorder Network Ports

Note: An Orion configuration is stored as an .ncd file on the PC’s hard drive. If logic is used, NCD
stores the logic in an associated .bas or .lua file located in the same directory. The name of
the .bas or .lua file is stored in the corresponding .ncd file.

If the .ncd file has been renamed, or the .ncd file has been moved without moving the associated .bas or
.lua file, NCD displays a prompt for the missing .bas or .lua file (see Figure 62). This is because the .ncd
file still contains the original name of the associated .bas or .lua file, but now the .bas or .lua file has a new
name, or is still in one directory while the .ncd file is in another directory. If the correct logic file name is not
entered, NCD will continue with an empty logic file.

Figure 62: NCD Prompt for Logic File

104
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Edit Menu
The Edit menu sets up features related to the operation of NCD.

Figure 63: Edit Menu

Once Settings is selected, the following window opens.

Figure 64: User Settings – Updates Tab

105
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
User Settings - Updates Tab

Under the Updates tab, the following features can be set up.

Orion Support Site User Information

Entering the NovaTech-issued User Name and Password allows automatic login to the NovaTech Orion
Support site to obtain update information . If the User Name and Password have not yet been issued,
clicking Request User Name generates an email to NovaTech using the default email client software
installed on the PC, such as Outlook.

NCD Update Options

NCD is updated based on the option selected here. Updates can be installed automatically whenever they
are available. A notification can be displayed when an update becomes available. If the update is
downloaded, the update will be installed automatically when NCD is restarted. If desired, updates can be
disabled altogether. The number of backup copies of the previous install to keep is designated here. This
can range from 0-3 with a default value of 3.

Proxy Server

If the PC is connected to the Internet using a proxy server, its address and port number must be entered to
allow NCD to access the NovaTech server.

106
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
User Settings - General Tab

In the first checkbox, the splash screen on NCD startup can be enabled and disabled.

Checking the Log Program Events/Errors box logs the NCD events and errors to the log file specified
in the directory path field. Clicking View Log File will open the current log file for viewing, and
clicking Delete Log File deletes the current log file.

If a specific default directory for NCD files, user default files, user SCL files, or user MIB files is needed
which is different from the NCD standard location, it must be entered in directory path field. To browse for
the desired file location, click the “Browse for Folder button” .

Figure 65: User Settings – General Tab

107
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
User Settings - Capture Tab

The live communications between the OrionLX and other devices can be captured to a file as described in
chapter Communication Window. The settings for the capture file are configured under the Capture tab
as shown in Figure 66.

If the Enable Capture File Limits box is not checked, the capture file can potentially occupy all
remaining free space on the hard drive. If the Enable Capture File Limits box is checked, the size
of the capture file and the number of capture files can be set.

File Size Limit sets the upper limit for a log file. The default maximum is 10 MB.

Limit Number of Capture Files limits the number of log files. The default value is 10.

If Rollover is enabled, the oldest capture file will be deleted when the above limits are reached. If the
box is not checked, the capture will stop when the above limits are reached.

Figure 66: User Settings – Capture Tab

108
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Configure Menu
The options under the menu item Configure set up all aspects of the Orion with regard to client and server
port configuration, point lists, logic, logging, redundancy, etc.

Figure 67: Configure Menu

The configuration is stored in an .ncd file on the PC’s hard drive using the steps described in the previous
chapter. If Logic is used, NCD stores the logic for an .ncd in an associated .bas or .lua file located in the
same directory. Once the .ncd (and .bas/.lua) file is created, it can be transferred from the PC to the Orion
using the One Click Transfer feature in the Quick Access Toolbar (Ethernet connection), the Orion
Webpage (Ethernet connection) or Orion MMI (serial connection or Ethernet connection).

Options under NKI – Time Interface, Add Ons, Hardware I/O, and Logic are marked with
once they are configured.

Additional drivers and options can be obtained by contacting NovaTech.

109
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Standard Software Features

The following software is standard for all OrionLX units.

▪ NKI – Time Interface
▪ System Logger
▪ Sensor

Other software options must be ordered specifically as shown in Software Options.

General

The following window is displayed for this selection. Table 50 provides the description for each setting in
the General Settings window.

Figure 68: General Settings

Setting Description
Force Inputs Allows forcing of input points from the Orion’s MMI console. If the box is checked
here and the input is forced in the MMI, the client station will see the input point
with the value forced at the Orion MMI, as opposed to the value obtained from
the end device. This feature helps debug the communication between the client
station and the Orion without having to force input values in the end device. See
the chapter Data Menu in the MMI section of this manual for details. Note that
for a user to be able to force inputs, the user account must be set up with this
option (see chapter Group Management).

110
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Setting Description
Force Outputs Allows forcing of output points from the Orion’s MMI console. If the box is
checked here and the output is forced in the MMI, the end device will receive a
value for an output point as forced by the Orion as opposed to sending a value
all the way from the client. This feature helps debug the communication between
the end device and the Orion without having to send output values in from the
client. See the chapter Data Menu in the MMI section of this manual for details.
Note that for a user to be able to force outputs, the user account must be set up
with this option (see chapter Group Management).
Comments This field allows recording of any kind of notes regarding this configuration, such
as location, specific parameters, history, etc.

Table 50: General Settings

Enabling Force Inputs allows forcing of input values through the

Orion’s MMI console. Then, the forced Orion data point(s) will indicate
an equipment state or condition to the SCADA master that is only
simulated, and does not reflect the actual state or condition. This may
lead the SCADA master or personnel to initiate operations based on the
simulated state as opposed to the actual state. The necessary
permissions must be obtained from the control center and other
departments in accordance with your corporate safety and operating
guidelines. Failure to do so could result in equipment damage, injury,
and/or death.

Enabling Force Outputs allows forcing of output values through the

Orion’s MMI console. This may operate a live piece of equipment on the
end device, the same way it would be operated locally, or from the front
end/SCADA master. The necessary permissions must be obtained from
the control center and other departments in accordance with your
corporate safety and operating guidelines. Failure to do so could result
in equipment damage, injury, and/or death.

111
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Hardware Model Information

The various models of Orion family are listed, and the available options will be shown after the model is
selected. Check any options that are installed on the Orion that you are configuring.

Figure 69: OrionLX Hardware Configuration

When the NCD file that is open is a cascaded NCD file, the model of the client and server(s) cannot be
changes. In this case, only the options may be changed.

112
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Operations in Port Setup Window

Most of the options described in the following chapters are configured using a port setup window with the
following Port Options displayed at the top of the window. Depending on the port type, all options may
not be available.

The asterisk (*) on the right side of the title bar text indicates that the current NCD setup has not yet been
saved.

Figure 70: Port Options

Action Description
Copy Port The current port configuration can be copied or moved to another port in the
Move Port same Orion configuration. If multiple configuration files are open, the ports in
the other configuration files are listed as well as targets for the copy or move
operation (Figure 71). The selection window for the target port is shown below.
Any port-specific parameters are automatically adjusted to the target port. All
other parameters are simply moved or copied.
Delete Port Remove the current port with all configured parameters and data points from the
configuration. If other ports map points defined on this port, these ports are
affected by the removal of this port.
Close Port After configuring all parameters and data points for this port, clicking this option
closes the port setup window.
Table 51: Port Options Operation

Figure 71: Chose Port for Copy/Move

113
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Serial Ports

Except for Port A (front panel port A, A1 or A2), all ports can be individually configured with a specific
protocol, and the related communication parameters, device lists, and point lists. All ports are independent
of each other, i.e. there are no limitations on the combinations of protocols used. After selecting a port in
Figure 72, the protocol selection screen in Figure 73 allows the selecting of the protocol for the port.

Figure 72: Serial Port Selection

Port Description
Port A Built-in diagnostics port. The communication parameters are 115200-N-8-1 and
cannot be changed.
Port B This port is always available as a built-in RS-232 port on the main processor
board (see also chapter Port B for details).
Port C This port is not available for configuration on the OrionLX. This port is only
available for use on the Orion16 model.
Port D This port is available as Port D if the internal Modem has been selected in chapter
Hardware Model Information.
Port 1-16 These ports can be RS-232, RS-485, RS-422, fiber, various bit protocols, and
HDLC depending on the modules ordered and installed in each slot (see Port 1-
16 Card Options).
Table 52: Orion Ports

114
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

Figure 73: Serial Protocol Selection Menu

After selecting the protocol, refer to the specific NovaTech protocol documentation to configure the port
communication parameters, RTU/device list, input point list, output point list, poll groups, and any other
related parameters. Example settings for Modbus Serial Server:

Figure 74: Serial Port Configuration

115
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Network

Under Network, the network ports are configured. Port 23 is a default HTTP Server port. Selecting
Configure New Port (Figure 75) adds a new port to the configuration using protocol which is selected
on the screen shown in Figure 76.

Figure 75: Network Parameter and Port Configuration

Figure 76: Network Protocol Selection Menu

116
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
After selecting the protocol, refer to the specific NovaTech protocol documentation to configure the port
communication parameters, RTU/device list, input point list, output point list, poll groups, and any other
related parameters.

NKI – Time Interface

The Orion time synchronization software module is a standard Orion feature. It is used for obtaining and
distributing time. This module samples IRIG-B and/or NTP time sources, providing highly accurate time
and date in the Orion. IRIG-B and NTP can be sampled concurrently for redundant time sources. The
Orion can, in turn, distribute time via IRIG-B and NTP.

An additional one-pulse-per-second (1PPS) input is provided for situations when both time sources are lost.
Commonly the 1PPS input is used with GPS clocks. Most clocks provide a highly accurate pulse output to
minimize drift in the receiving device, i.e. the Orion, during satellite fade.

Synchronization is accomplished through constant sampling. Thousands of time samples are required
before the Orion adjusts its time. On power up, it can take the Orion up to 30 minutes to set the Time
Quality Flag, which indicates 1 ms accuracy. Under rare circumstances, it can take up to 8 hours for the
flag to set when no frequency drift file is present on the Orion.

On the Port tab, the Orion driver and port information is entered. For most configurations, the default
parameters generated during creation of the configuration file are correct and need not be changed.

Figure 77: NKI – Port Setup

Parameter Description
Port Name The default name is NTP Kernel If the name is changed, the new port name
should describe the port’s purpose, as this will provide self-explaining MMI
menus when the Orion is operating. This string can be up to 30 characters
long, and can contain all printable characters except @, [, ], ', ", &, =, and
commas.
Module Name The Module Name specifies which protocol driver will be utilized in the Orion.
NKI defaults to mnki, which is required for NKI and cannot be edited.

Table 53: NKI Port – General Options

117
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
In the screen shown below, the following data points can be configured as explained in Table 54. These
points can be monitored by a SCADA master and used in the Orion logic. The parameters for each point
are explained in Table 55.

Figure 78: NKI Input Points

Inputs Function
Orion PLL Offset The last applied correction to the system clock in seconds.
Source scaling: -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647.
Orion PLL Freq The automatic periodic correction to the system clock in Parts Per Million
(PPM). Positive values make the clock go faster while negative values slow it
down.
Source scaling: -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647.
Orion MaxErr The maximum clock error in seconds.
Source scaling: -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647.
Orion EstErr The estimated collective time source error in seconds. This value will vary from
Orion to Orion.
Source scaling: -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647.
Orion PLL Status The PLL status is represented by a numerical range. If the PLL is enabled,
synchronization is occurring (synchronization is a never-ending process when
connected to a time source). Entering the following command on the MMI
command line displays the current status condition along with a brief
description:
# ntpdc –c kern
Source scaling: -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647.

118
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Inputs Function
Orion Time The time quality of the Orion time daemon. This value is 0 when no time
Quality sources are reachable or if estimated error is greater than or equal to 0.03
seconds…32 if estimated error is less than 0.0005 seconds…31 if estimated
error is less than 0.00075 seconds.
Source scaling: 0 to 32.
Orion Time Binary point indicating time accuracy. On indicates accuracy to +/- 500 µsec.
Quality Binary Source scaling: 0 to 1.
Orion Time This is an 8-bit register with the bits corresponding to the reachability of a
Reachability configured source during the last 8 poll cycles. 0 indicates no sources were
reached during the last 8 polls. 255 (decimal) indicates a source was reached
during each the last 8 polls. Bit 0 (LSB) corresponds to the most recent poll
issued while bit 7 (MSB) represents the poll “8 polls ago”.
Source scaling: 0 to 255.

Table 54: NKI – Time Interface Data Points

Parameter Description
Orion Point Name Using self-explanatory names facilitates online monitoring of the Orion’s
operation. This string can be up to 30 characters long, and can contain all
printable characters except @, [, ], ', ", =, and commas. The Orion Point
Name and the Device name are combined into the tagname which references
the point within this port, as well as all other ports/protocols where that point
might be used.
Alias Name Displays the Alias Name (specified in the Alias module under Add Ons).
Point Type There are eight point types used for the predefined points. The types are:
offset, freq, maxerr, esterr, status, quality, qualitybin,
and reach
The Point Type cannot be modified by the user since it is predefined in the
Orion.
Device The only Device available on this tab is the predefined Orion Internal
device since each Orion has only one NKI port.
Min/Max Values Each point has a minimum and maximum value. The minimum and maximum
values are used by the NKI to normalize the value and make it available to
other ports in the Orion. A complete discussion of scaling is provided in
NovaTech’s Analog/Accumulator Scaling Technical Note.

Table 55: NKI – Time Interface Parameters

119
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Add Ons

The Orion has numerous additional modules for data retrieval, storage, logging, and communications
available. These modules are configured under Add Ons (Figure 79).

Figure 79: Add On Options

For each option, the respective NovaTech software manual provides complete instructions regarding setup
and operation.

Alarm/Archive/Retentive

The Alarm/Archive/Retentive option sets up alarming, archiving and retention (restoration of point
values after a power-cycle) of data points. These values are then written to the database. The
Alarm/Archive/Retentive Software Manual provides the necessary details regarding the setup and
operation of this option.

Alias

The Alias feature is a standard feature of the Orion. It allows mapping the point names as generated
during the Orion configuration to external point names imported from a .csv file. From then on, the Orion
data points can be referred to by their imported point names throughout the Orion software, menus, and
webpage. This feature is useful for importing standard point names already defined and used in the
corporate setting. Thus, without any additional training, all staff are immediately familiar with all data points
which are configured in the Orion, because those are the names already in use.

120
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
When opening the Alias option, the following screen is displayed with all Inputs and all Outputs that
have been configured for the current configuration file. Select Inputs or Outputs in the pane on the left.
In the center pane, all configured input or output points are displayed. In the right pane, the Load File
button allows opening of a .csv or .txt file which contains a simple list with all input and output aliases, i.e.
existing names that are already used in the corporate environment, to describe the points currently in
operation (see example in Table 56). Alternately, you can copy/paste or drag/drop one or more cells from
a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet into the Available Alias Names field to create additional alias names.
In the .ncd file, the Alias names can be a maximum of 63 characters. There are seven (7) characters that
cannot be used in the Alias name (@, [, ], ’, ”, =, comma).

Figure 80: Alias Assignment

Each point can be assigned its alias by drag and drop. Aliases can also be entered manually.

The .csv or .txt file containing the alias names consists of a single column as shown in the following table.
Both the list of input aliases and the list of output aliases require a specific header ([Input Alias] and
[Output Alias]) for the alias file to be useable by NCD.

Note: The headers, [Input Alias] for the input alias list and [Output Alias] for the output
alias list are required. Without the header, the alias list will not be imported.

The size of the .csv or .txt file depends on the number of points configured in the OrionLX and the number
of points existing in the corporate environment. If multiple Orions are used, multiple alias files can be
created, each representing a subset of the total number of existing points in the control system.

121
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

[Input Alias]
AliasName for Input1
AliasName for Input2
AliasName for Input3
AliasName for Input4
AliasName for Input5
AliasName for Input6
AliasName for Input7
AliasName for Input8

[Output Alias]
AliasName for Output1
AliasName for Output2
AliasName for Output3
AliasName for Output4
AliasName for Output5
AliasName for Output6
AliasName for Output7
AliasName for Output8

Table 56: Alias File Format

Once all input and output aliases have been assigned, clicking Close at the top of the window closes the
Alias Interface (Figure 80).

Average Archive

The Average Archive Module archives load data from one or more substations devices and stores this data
in non-volatile memory as a PostgreSQL database for future analysis. Stored data can be retrieved either
locally at the Orion or remotely via an Ethernet connection. For configuration and operation information see
the Average Archive Module Manual.

Configuration Manager Agent

The Configuration Manager Agent ties the Orion into the NovaTech Configuration Manager software. This
software manages the configurations of the Orion and downstream devices and is available separately from
NovaTech.

The Configuration Manager Agent creates a ZIP file containing configuration information for the OrionLX
and its connected relays. The agent scans the relays using the command list specified in the NCD file,
captures additional information from the Orion, and packages the results into a ZIP file on the Orion. The
ZIP file produced by the Configuration Manager Agent is named according to the IEEE C37.232 standard,
which requires the timestamp, substation name, device name, and company name. The following table
explains the components of the ZIP file name in greater detail.

122
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Example Value IEEE C37.232 Field Description
150424 StartDate Date of file creation (YYMMDD)
163415026179 StartTime Time of file creation (HHMMSSmicroseconds)
0 TimeCode Time code (0 denotes UTC)
Station1 StationId The Station Name property set in NCD
Orion1 DeviceId The Orion Name property set in NCD
PowerCompany CompanyName The Company Name property set in NCD

Table 57: ZIP File Naming Convention

The .zip file produced by the Configuration Manager Agent contains the following files.

▪ Log files: Individual log files for the ports configured in NCD on the Configuration Manager Agent
Ports tab. The file name for each log file uses the Station Name, Device Name, and Company Name
components, with an additional port number component. The start date, start time, and time code can
also be included.
▪ User files: All user files currently on the Orion, including the following file types.
o Active NCD file and logic files (.bas, .lua, and .ncz).
o Orion16.ini file that specifies active NCD file.
o All SVG files.
▪ Sysfiles: System configuration files. These files are stored in the Sysfiles subdirectory in the .zip file.
▪ orionlx.ntk: This file contains the license keys for all NovaTech software components installed on the
Orion.
▪ packages.txt: This report lists the Orion serial number and all the packages that have been
automatically installed on the Orion. The version number of each package is included.
▪ openports.txt: This report lists all listener sockets on the Orion. These listeners can include IP, TCP,
UDP, and Unix Socket listeners. This information indicates what open ports currently exist for the Orion.
▪ sysfiles_attr.txt: This report uses typical Linux listing methodology to list all the files included in the
Sysfiles directory, including file attributes and date.

The General tab allows you to manage settings for the .zip file and .log files produced by the Configuration
Manager Agent. You can modify the following settings.

123
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

Figure 81: Configuration Manager Agent General Settings

Parameters Description
Station Name This field entry determines the first part of the ZIP file name and each of the LOG
file names.
Orion Name This field entry determines the second part of the ZIP file name and each of the
LOG file names.
Company Name This field entry determines the third part of the ZIP file name and each of the LOG
file names.
Output This field entry determines the file path location on the Orion where the ZIP file
Directory is created. You must either retrieve this file from the selected directory on the
Orion after the file is created or use FileMover to automatically transfer. You can
ignore the other temporary files created in that directory.
Purge Old This option instructs the Orion to remove any ZIP files that currently exist in the
Archives output directory whenever a new ZIP file is generated. This option can prevent
the directory from taking up too much space on the Orion. If you select this option,
there will only be one such ZIP file at any time. Make sure you have a process in
place to retrieve the generated file before the file is purged. This option is selected
by default.
Include Time This option includes the recorded creation time and date in the file name for each
Stamp of the generated LOG files. This is the same time stamp that displays in the ZIP
file name itself. This option is not selected by default.

124
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Parameters Description
Checksum Point If you select this option, at the specified point name, the Orion will create a
checksum of all the content in the files in the ZIP file. Since the MD5SUM result
is a 128 bit value, the checksum is stored in the specified point as a string. You
can monitor the checksums using another software utility to determine if the file
contents have changed. Use this process to pinpoint unintended changes in the
Orion and the specified ports. If you select this option, a new point is created
inside the Orion with the name entered in the Point Name field.

Table 58: Configuration Manager Agent General Settings

After making modifications to the settings on the General tab, click the Accept button.

On the Ports tab, select the ports you want to generate log files. By default, all ports with a defined SEL®
Client protocol are included in the Available Ports list. If a port has no selected commands, the
configuration agent manager does not produce a log file for that port.

Figure 82: Select Port Commands

Data Logger

The Data Logger option sets up data points for logging to files. Multiple files can be set up for logging.
Points related to each other can be logged to the same file. The setup and operation of this option are
described in the Data Logger Software Manual.

125
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Orion Redundancy

Orion Redundancy is a hot standby redundancy configuration consisting of a Primary Orion and a
Secondary Orion running the identical configuration file. With Orion Redundancy, user system performance
requirements will not be impacted by the failure of one system component. The failure will be detected and
initiate an automatic switchover to the standby Orion. The repair of the failed component of the system and
the normal monitoring and maintenance of the sub-station can be accomplished without causing the system
to be inoperable. See also the Orion Redundancy Software Manual.

Points Blocking

SCADA Points Blocking is defined as the action of temporarily not reporting changes in real-time data
values to SCADA. This is sometimes referred to as “Alarm Shelving”. The Points Blocking module can be
ordered for the Orion to enable users to temporarily block the reporting of selected points, or groups of
points, to SCADA. See also the Points Blocking Module Manual.

Pseudo

Typically, data is polled from the end device by the Orion through a client port, and in turn, an Orion server
port is polled by a client station, such as a SCADA master or HMI. However, some applications specify
that the Orion be connected to two client stations, and data to be exchanged between two clients. Thus,
the outputs of one client become the inputs of the other client, and vice versa. This option allows setting
up the data transfer between two server ports on the Orion, i.e. data between two client stations is
exchanged. The setup and operation of this option are described in the Pseudo Client Software Manual.

Pusher

Typically, the Orion is polling data from the end device using a client port. In turn, an Orion server port is
polled by a client station. However, some applications specify that the Orion be connected to two server
devices, and for data to be exchanged between those two server devices. A typical example is two PLCs
connected to the Orion, with the PLCs needing to exchange data. Thus, the Orion reads the inputs from
one server device and writes them as outputs to the other server device, and vice versa. This option allows
setting up the data transfer between two client ports on the Orion, i.e. data between two server stations is
exchanged. The setup and operation of this option are described in the Orion Pusher Manual. This option
is an integrated part of the Modbus Client (see Modbus Client Manual) and SEL Client (see SEL® Client
Manual).

Sensor

The Sensor Client module is a standard feature with all Orion models. It monitors the Orion hardware-
related sensor points (temperature, voltages, firewall status, and alarm status) and security points (login,
failed login, remote login, and SSHD status) and makes these values available as analog or discrete data
points for logging, processing in logic, or clients stations. All hardware and security data points shown in
Table 59 and Table 61 are available in the Orion default setup plus additional power supply data points for
the OrionLX+ shown in Table 60.

126
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

Figure 83: Sensor Setup - Port

By default, the alarm status, firewall status, syslog error, Ethernet port statuses, and hardware-related
sensor points are included in the Orion realtime database.

Figure 84: Sensor Setup - Inputs

127
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Input Function
eth0 link The respective Ethernet port has a good link to another device or switch.
eth1 link
eth2 link Note: Ethernet ports eth3 and eth4 are available only in the OrionLX+.
eth3 link
eth4 link
eth0 activity There is communication activity on the respective Ethernet port.
eth1 activity
eth2 activity Note: Ethernet ports eth3 and eth4 are available only in the OrionLX+.
eth3 activity
eth4 activity
Orion 3B Volts The current 3B voltage of the Orion. The default source scaling is 0..255. On a
server port that this point is mapped to, either 16-bit integer or floating point
format should be used for setting up this point. For 16-bit integers, the range
must be defined as 0..65535. In the mapped point, the voltage is then indicated
as a number between 0 and 6640, representing a voltage between 0 and 6.64
Volts. If the mapped point is set up as a floating point value, the range must be
defined as 0..65535. The voltage is then indicated as a number between 0 and
6.64 Volts.
Source scaling: 0 to 255.
Orion 3A Volts The current 3A voltage of the Orion. The default source scaling is 0..255. On a
server port that this point is mapped to, either 16-bit integer or floating point
format should be used for setting up this point. For 16-bit integers, the range
must be defined as 0..65,535. In the mapped point, the voltage is then indicated
as a number between 0 and 4382, representing a voltage between 0 and 4.382
Volts. If the mapped point is set up as a floating point value, the range must be
defined as 0..65.535. The voltage is then indicated as a number between 0 and
4.382 Volts.
Source scaling: 0 to 255.
Orion 5 Volts The current 5V voltage of the Orion. The default source scaling is 0..255. On a
server port that this point is mapped to, either 16-bit integer or floating point
format should be used for setting up this point. For 16-bit integers, the range
must be defined as 0..65,535. In the mapped point, the voltage is then indicated
as a number between 0 and 6640, representing a voltage between 0 and 6.64
Volts. If the mapped point is set up as a floating point value, the range must be
defined as 0..65.535. The voltage is then indicated as a number between 0 and
6.64 Volts.
Source scaling: 0 to 255.
Orion The current temperature inside the Orion. The temperature is made available in
Temperature degrees Celsius.
Source scaling: -128 to 127.
ttyS2 off hook The modem is off hook.
ttyS20 off hook Source scaling: 0 to 1 (Off and On).

Table 59: Sensor Setup – OrionLX and OrionLX+ Hardware Inputs

128
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Input Function
Orion 12 Volts Analog value representing 12V dc bus voltage. The default source
scaling is 0..255 (analog value  0.062 = voltage reading).
Power Supply 1(2) Binary input indicating general status of the power supply:
health 1 – Indicates good health (text attribute is “Good”).
0 – Indicates less than good health (text attributes are “Unknown”,
“Unspecified Failure” and “Dead”)
Power Supply 1(2) Binary Input:
online 1 – Indicates power supply output ≥ 10V dc
0 – Indicates power supply output < 10V dc
Power Supply 1(2) Binary Input:
present 1 – Power supply in slot
0 – No power supply in slot

129
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Input Function
Power Supply 1(2) bus
voltage
Power Supply 1(2) These points provide internal measurements for advanced power
current supply diagnostics by NovaTech Tech Support.
Power Supply 1(2)
local Note: These points do not measure the external voltage or
Power Supply 1(2) current supplied to the OrionLX+.
power
Power Supply 1(2)
shunt voltage

Table 60: Sensor Setup - OrionLX+ Hardware Inputs

Input Function
Active Config The string attribute of this point will contain the name of the active NCD file. Value
is 1 when string attribute contains the active NCD file, value is 0 when the active
NCD file cannot be obtained.
Alarm Status Binary point indicating whether an alarm is active. When mapped, the range of
the mapped point must be 0…1. An active alarm is also indicated by the Alarm
LED (see Alarm) and the Alarm Output (see Digital Outputs).
Source scaling: 0 to 1 (Off and On).
Available Analog value showing the available memory space available. Value is in Bytes.
Memory Range is 0 to 2000000.
Distro Version The version, such as “9.6.0”, will be displayed in the string attribute.
Firewall Status Binary point indicating whether the OrionLX firewall is turned off or turned on.
When mapped, the range of the mapped point must be 0…1. The firewall status
is also indicated by an LED on the front panel (see Firewall).
Source scaling: 0 to 1 (Off and On).
Free Memory Analog value showing the free memory space available. Value is in Bytes. Range
is 0 to 2000000.
GDM Session Value is 1 if user is logged in via attached keyboard and monitor. This includes
Status locked screens. Value is 0 if no user is logged in.
Affected application(s): MMB Keyboard and Monitor
HTTP Session Value is 1 if HTTP login is used. Value is 0 with logout, including idle timeout.
Status Affected application(s): HTTP
HTTPS Session Value is 1 with HTTPS login. Value is 0 with logout, including idle timeout.
Status Affected application(s): HTTPS
IEC61131 Value is 1 if IEC61131-3 login is made via NCD. Value is 0 with logout, including
Session Status idle timeout.
Affected application(s): Debug connection via NCD

130
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Input Function
Invalid Incremental counter registering each invalid signature failure. Indicates execution
Signature of a file, kernel module or peripheral firmware loading was blocked due to a failed
Failure signature verification. When this point is mapped, it will create a system log entry
that mirrors the audit log entry but will contain a level so the entry can be sent via
syslog protocol. Range is 0 to 65535.
Known User Increments every time a known user fails to log in. Does not decrement. Value
Login Failure is 0 on reboot. The value of this point is also available as Text event.
Count Examples of Text event format:
host slog username attempted login on app
Affected application(s): Any
Local Root Value is 1 if local root login is used. Value is 0 with local root logout, including
Session Status idle timeout.
Affected application(s): GDM and TTY
Local Session Value is 1 if local login is used. Value is 0 with local logout, including idle timeout.
Status Affected application(s): GDM and TTY
Login Telnet Value is 1 if Telnet login is used. Value is 0 with logout, including idle timeout.
Session Status Affected application(s): Telnet
Login TTY Value is 1 with TTY login. Value is 0 with logout, including idle timeout.
Session Status Affected application(s): TTY (Serial Port)
PPP Session Value is 1 if user is connected and logged in via PPP (dial up networking); value
Status is 0 with logout or disconnect, including idle timeout.
Affected application(s): PPP (Dial-up networking)
Pro FTPD Value is 1 if FTP login is used. Value is 0 with logout, including idle timeout.
Session Status Affected application(s): FTP (SFTP is part of SSH)
Remote Root Value is 1 if remote root login is used. Value is 0 with remote root logout,
Session Status including idle timeout.
Affected application(s): Network
Remote Session Value is 1 if remote login is used. Value is 0 with remote logout, including idle
Status timeout.
Affected application(s): Network
Root Session Value is 1 if root login is used. Value is 0 with root logout, including idle timeout.
Status Affected application(s): Local or Remote Root
Secure Passthru Value is 1 if NCM is connected and logged into. Value is 0 with no NCM
Session Status connections are used, including idle timeout.
Affected application(s): Debug connection via NCD
SSHD Session Value is 1 if SSH or SFTP login is used. Value is 0 with logout, including idle
Status timeout.
Affected application(s): SSH, SFTP
Syslog Error Binary point indicating an error with the system log file. Values is 0 (Off), 1 (On).

131
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Input Function
Unknown User Increments every time an unknown user tries to log in. Does not
Login Failure decrement. Value is 0 on Orion process restart or reboot. The value of this point
Count is also available as Text event.
Examples of Text event format:
host slog Invalid user username attempted login on app
Affected application(s): Any
User Lockout Increments every time a user is locked out. Does not decrement when user is
Count unlocked out. Value is 0 on Orion process restart or reboot. The value of this
point is also available as Text event.
Examples of Text event format:
host slog User username is locked out
Affected application(s): Any
User Login Increments with every login. Decrements with each logout, including idle
Count timeout. Value is 0 on Orion process restart or reboot. The value of this point is
also available as Text event.
Examples of Text event format:
host slog username login on app
host slog username logout on app
Affected application(s): Any
Note: All of the above text events will be attached to this point.

Table 61: Sensor Setup - Security Points

System Logger

The System Logger is a standard Orion feature. It allows logging of system events, such as operation and
communication related events, as well as point changes for all points or a specified list of points. The
setup and operation of this option are described in the System & Point Logger Manual.

Text Module

The Text module monitors the current values of specified discrete or analog points and generates text
string events for the monitored point. For specific values, text strings can be defined, and when the point
assumes a specific value, the associated text is generated. The Email, Datalogger, and Logic modules of
the Orion can subscribe to the generated text strings for various purposes, such as sending emails. The
setup and operation of this option are described in the Text Module Manual. See also Email Manual, Data
Logger Manual, and Advanced Math & Logic Software Manual.

132
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Hardware I/O

The Orion provides built-in discrete points for monitoring and diagnostic purposes. Four discrete inputs
and four discrete outputs are provided on the rear panel of the OrionLX and on the NC0 and NC1
expansion cards of the OrionLX+. The OrionLX+ NC3 expansion card provides four discrete inputs and
two discrete outputs.

Figure 85: Hardware I/O

SER

The Orion provides a limited number of built-in discrete I/O. These points can be configured using the SER
(Sequence of Events Recorder) module. Inputs can be time stamped to 1ms when the Orion is receiving
time synchronization. In addition, an accumulator can be set up for each discrete input which counts each
change for the associated discrete input.

The inputs are factory set as either low voltage (12-24V dc) or high voltage (125-250V dc) inputs, which is
indicated by the checkbox positioned over the input connector. The digital inputs are polarity dependent
and described in the section Digital Inputs. The digital outputs are dry contacts and described in the section
Digital Outputs.

The SER I/O is set up as described in this section. The setup is saved in the .ncd file.

After selecting Hardware I/O -> Built-in Standard (SER) as shown in Figure 85, the following
screen is displayed. Each item in the SER Client menu tree is described in the order to be processed. After
completing the parameters on each item, Accept must be clicked to save any changes to the default
settings.

133
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Port – General Options

On the Port selection, enter the SER port name.

Figure 86: SER Setup – Port

Parameter Description
Port Name The default name is SER Client If the name is changed, a port name that
describes the ports purpose should be used, as this will provide self-explaining
MMI menus when the Orion is operating.
Module Name The Module Name specifies which protocol driver will be utilized in the Orion.
SER defaults to mser, which is required and cannot be edited.

Table 62: SER Setup – Port

134
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
SER Description

Select SER to set the description of the sequence of events recorder.

Figure 87: SER Description

Parameter Description
Description The description entered here will be used throughout the Orion configuration.
Using a description such as SER of Local makes the displays self-explanatory.

Table 63: SER Setup - Description

135
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Inputs Configuration

Select Inputs to configure the discrete and associated accumulators/counters of the Hardware I/O/SER
Client Port.

Figure 88: OrionLX SER Setup – Inputs

Figure 89: OrionLX+ SER Setup - Inputs

The left column, Inputs – Default Tagname, shows a complete list of available input points in the SER
I/O. The list can be sorted by alphabet or by text search. Any Orion input point to be used in the Orion’s
configuration must be highlighted in the left column and moved to the right column by clicking >> .
Highlighting a point in the right column and clicking << removes the highlighted point from the Configured
Inputs.

Parameter Description
Orion Point The Point Name which references the point within this port, as well as all other
Name ports/protocols where that point might be used. Using self-explanatory names
facilitates online monitoring of the Orion’s operation. This string can be up to 50
characters long, and can contain all printable characters except @, [, ], ', ", =, and
commas.
Alias Name Displays the Alias Name, as specified in the Alias module, if it is configured.

136
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Parameter Description
Point Type Point type Binary for the discrete input itself, and Counter for the associated
accumulator that counts the changes of the discrete input.
Point Number The valid range for both binary inputs and counter inputs is 1..4 corresponding to
physical inputs Input01..Input04. The Binary input with address 1 maps the
first discrete input Input01, and the Counter input with address 1 counts the
changes of the first discrete input Input01, and so on.
For the OrionLX only, two additional binary inputs are provided for Power Supply
1 Status and Power Supply 2 Status. These points are normally closed
points (0 is alarm).
Filter Time The binary input must remain in the new state for at least the specified contact
(msec) Filter Time for the new state to be recorded by the Orion. The time recorded will
be the initial change of state time (prior to the filter). If the input remains in the new
state for less than the contact Filter Time, no change of state and no event will
be recorded. The default setting for the contact Filter Time is 0. The contact
Filter Time can be set to any value up to 65,535 msec.
Debounce Time After the contact Filter Time expires, all subsequent binary input state changes
(msec) are disregarded until the Debounce Time has elapsed. Then the digital input is
monitored for changes again. The default setting for Debounce Time is 0. The
Debounce Time can be set to any value up to 65,535msec.
Chatter Count If, in the interval set in the Chatter Time field (sliding interval), more input state
transitions occur than are allowed as per Chatter Count, the point is put into the
Chatter State. When the input stabilizes, and the chatter falls below the configured
Chatter Count for the current sliding window, the point is again reported normally
with its current state and events. The default setting for Chatter Count is 60 state
changes. The Chatter Count can be set to any value up to 99999.
Chatter Time Interval in microseconds of the sliding interval of time used with the Chatter Count
value.

Table 64: SER Configured Inputs Parameters

137
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Outputs Configuration

Select Outputs to configure the discrete outputs of the Orion’s I/O.

Figure 90: SER Setup – Outputs

The left column, Outputs – Default Tagname, shows a complete list of available SER I/O output
points. The complete list is shown, which can be sorted by alphabet or by text search. Any Orion output
point to be used in the Orion’s configuration must be highlighted in the left column and moved to the right
column by clicking >> . Highlighting a point in the right column and clicking << removes the highlighted
point from the Orion’s configuration.

Parameter Description
Orion Point The Point Name and the Device name are combined into the Tagname which
Name references the point within this port, as well as all other ports/protocols where that point
might be used. Using self-explanatory names facilitates online monitoring of the Orion’s
operation. This string can be up to 50 characters long, and can contain all printable
characters except @, [, ], ', ", =, and commas.
Alias Name Displays the Alias Name as specified in the Alias module, if it is configured. The alias
has the format of <SER Description>_<output Tag Name>

138
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Parameter Description
Point Type Each configured output point defaults to Latch but the Point Type can be changed to
one of three output types:

SER Output Type Dropdown List

Output Description
Type
TC If an output point is designated as a Trip/Close, two consecutive
physical outputs are mapped. The first output is pulsed if a Trip
command is received, and the second output is pulsed if a Close
command is received. When On Time expires, the output is set to
Off/Open again. For example, if Output1 is configured as TC, then
output Output1 (see Figure 19) is the Trip coil, and output Output2
is the Close coil.

Command Output1 Output2

0 (Trip) Pulsed ---
1 (Close) --- Pulsed

Pulse A Pulse output is pulsed with the time specified in On Time when
a command is received. A Pulse output is mapped to a single
output coil, i.e. point number 1 is Output1, point number 2 is
Output2, etc.
Latch A Latch output stays in the commanded position after the command
is received. A 0 opens the coils, and a 1 closes the coil. A Latch
output is mapped to a single output coil, i.e. point number 1 is
Output1, point number 2 is Output2, etc.

Point The valid range for discrete outputs is 1..4, corresponding to physical outputs
Number Output1..Output4.
Timer/Pulse Allows overriding of On Time, Off Time and Pulses received from the server port.
Override If checked, the user defined On Time, Off Time and Pulses are used instead of
values sent to the Orion server port. If unchecked, the On Time, Off Time and
Pulses will only be used if the value sent to the server port is 0. This applies only to
TC and Pulse output types.
On Time Number of milliseconds to pulse an output. Only applies to TC and Pulse output types.
(msec)
Off Time Number of milliseconds between output pulses. Only applies to Pulse output type.
(msec)
Pulses Number of output pulses to send. Only applies to Pulse output type.

Table 65: SER Setup – Outputs

139
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Logic

The Orion provides five logic options (Figure 91). All logic modules process the selected input points and
output points and the user-programmed logic. They can set any input or output point configured in the
Orion. Logic also defines and sets internal data points points which can be used by external client or server
devices

Figure 91: Logic Options

Math & Logic

Math and Logic is the basic logic module. A complete description of this module is provided in the Math
& Logic Software Manual.

Advanced Math & Logic

Advanced Math and Logic utilizes the Lua programming language (Lua 5.3.5 – Copyright © 2015–
2020 Lua.org, PUC-Rio). A complete description of this module is provided in the Advanced Math & Logic
Software Manual. For a complete reference of the Lua programming language, refer to the complete online
reference manual via the following link: http://www.lua.org/manual/5.3/manual.html .
H H

140
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
LogicPak

The LogicPak module provides the following pre-packaged input and output functions.

Input functions:
▪ PrimarySecondary
▪ OR
▪ AND
▪ Negate
▪ KYZ Relay
▪ Delay
▪ Calculator
Output functions:
▪ LocalRemote
▪ Negate
▪ PrimarySecondary

A complete description of this module is provided in the LogicPak Software Manual.

Distribution Automation (DA)

The DA logic module sets up the Distribution Automation module which provides control for electrical grid
functions and operations on the distribution level. Before the DA Logic can be set up, all client ports in the
Orion that communicate with the respective RTUs in the DA Logic must be set up. A complete description
of this module is provided in the DA Logic Software Manual.

IEC 61131-3

The full set of IEC 61131-3 programming languages is available for the Orion:
▪ Structured Flow Chart
▪ Function Block Diagram
▪ Ladder Diagram
▪ Structured Text
▪ Instruction Language

A complete description of this module is provided in the IEC 61131 Logic Software Manual.

141
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Communications Menu
The following steps show how to connect to the Orion using NCD (NovaTech Configuration Director) either
by way of a serial connection or an Ethernet connection.

Note: During the initial setup of the Orion, its IP address must be entered using the serial MMI as
described in Network Menu

If another terminal software program is being used, consult the documentation supplied with that software
for setup of a connection to the Orion.

Select the Communications tab and choose Online Connections (Figure 92) to open the Manage
Connections window (Figure 93).

Figure 92: NCD Communications

142
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

Figure 93: Manage Connections

New connections are created by highlighting Connections at the top of the pane (Figure 93) which
enables the New Connection button. Then click on New Connection to open the following window
(Figure 94).

143
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Button Function
New Connection Creates a new connection, and opens the window for configuration as
shown in Figure 94. In this window, the connection name is entered,
such as Washington County Substations.
Delete Connection Deletes the highlighted connection.
Edit Connection Opens the window (Figure 94) for editing the highlighted connection.
Connect Uses the parameters from the highlighted connection to connect to an
Orion.
Close Closes the Manage Connections window.
Advanced >>
<< Simple Toggles the display of the following actions.

Group Folder Actions

Create New Creates a new folder for connections, such as Western Utah.
Under a folder, new specific connections can be created, such as
North or West. Folders can be nested. This allows easy connection
management for multiple devices or locations.
Deleted Selected Deletes the currently selected folder and all connections in it.
Rename Selected Renames the currently selected folder.
File Actions
Create New Create a new .conn file for saving all connections presently displayed
in the Connections pane.
Save Configuration Saves all current connections to a file as shown in Figure 95.
Load File Load a previously saved connection file.

Table 66: Manage Connections

NCD supports multiple serial and Ethernet connections. The settings for each connection can be saved to
a separate file.

The bottom section of the Manage Connections window allows saving and loading the connection files
from the hard drive. The display of this section can be toggled by
clicking Advanced >> and << Simple .

In the Simple display of the Manage Connections window, all items below the << Simple button
(Figure 93) are hidden. In the Advanced display, the items below the Simply button are displayed as shown
in Figure 93.

Most of the time, the Simple display is sufficient. When working in larger or multiple regions, then the
Advanced display helps with grouping the connections in two ways. See also Grouping Connections.

▪ Creating and managing groups such as “Western Utah” to group connections by user-specific criteria
using the buttons in the group “Group Folder Actions”.
▪ Creating and managing different connection files for different regions, etc. when even more connections
are needed. These files can then be loaded as needed. The related buttons are in the group “File
actions”.

144
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

Figure 94: Connection Information

Clicking OK saves the parameters and returns to the Manage Connections window.
Clicking Cancel abandons any changes and returns to the Manage Connections window.

Note: The communication parameters for connection to serial Port A of the Orion are 115200,N,8,1.

Parameter Description
Connection Name The name entered here is used to display the connection in Figure 93.
File Transfer The default value is 1024 bytes. To facilitate communication on slower
Packet Size connections such as radio modems, this value can be set to 128 bytes.
Serial These four buttons select the type of connection. Only one button can be
TCP/IP Connection selected for a connection. If a button is selected, the associated parameter
SSH frame (Serial Connection or Settings) is enabled, while the other
frame is disabled.
Telnet

145
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Parameter Description

Serial Connection

Comm Port Select the COM port used to connect to the Orion. If Show All is checked,
any COM port between 1 and 256 can be selected, whether it is installed or
not on the PC. If Show All is not checked, only the COM ports installed
on the PC will be available for selection. Window assigns the COM ports
randomly. It is recommended to check the Device Manager to determine the
current COM port assignment. In the following example, an OrionLXm is
connected to COM10. Other Orion models are displayed accordingly when
connected to the PC.

Parity None, Odd, or Even can be selected. The Orion supports No Parity.
Data Bits 7 or 8 data bits can be selected. The Orion supports 8 data bits.
Stop Bit 1 or 2 stop bits can be selected. The Orion supports 1 stop bit.
Baud Rate Baud rates between 1200 and 115200 baud can be selected from the
dropdown list. The Orion supports 115200 baud.

Network Connection

Host Address Enter the IP address of the Orion that this connection is set for.
Port Specifies the TCP Port number for the connection if User Specified port
number is selected. If User Specified is not selected the default SSH
(22) or Telnet (23) TCP Port number will be used.
Login Retention Retains the username and password entered when the user checks the
Time (min) Remember Until Terminal Closes or Timeout box on the Login
message box.
Default is 30 minutes.

Terminal Colors
Back Color Background color of the window used to communicate with the Orion.
Fore Color Foreground color of the window used to communicate with the Orion.
Font Font used to display text in the window used to communicate with the Orion.

Table 67: Connection Information

146
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Grouping Connections

NCD supports multiple serial and Ethernet connections to provide access to Orions. The connections can
be grouped in groups like “Western Utah” or saved to different files.

The bottom section of the Manage Connections window provides the means for creating, saving, and
loading connection files from the PC hard drive. The display of this section can be toggled by
clicking Advanced >> and << Simple button (Figure 93).

Button Function
<< Simple Toggles the display of the following five options (Figure 93).
Advanced >>

Group Folder Actions

Create New Creates a new folder for connections, such as Western Utah.
Under a folder, new specific connections can be created, such as
North or West. Folders can be nested. This allows easy connection
management for multiple devices or locations.
Deleted Selected Deletes the currently selected folder and all connections in it.
Rename Selected Renames the currently selected folder.

File Actions

Create New Create a new .conn file for saving all connections presently displayed
in the Connections pane.
Save Configuration As Saves all current connections to a file as shown in Figure 95.
Load File Load a previously saved connection file.

Table 68: Manage Connections Folders and Files

Figure 95: Creating/Saving/Loading Connection Files

147
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Note: When a previously configured and working USB connection does not work, it is possible
that the USB cable was plugged into a different USB port, which results in a different
communication port number. The Windows Device Manager shows the connected COM
ports (Table 67).

Communication Window

After highlighting the desired connection and clicking Connect in Figure 93, NCD will open the following
communications window. Refer to section Orion MMI of this manual for more information regarding the
Orion MMI.

Figure 96: NCD Comm Window

148
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
The toolbar at the top of the window provides the following tools.

Parameter Description
Edit Connection Clicking this button opens the Connection Information window shown
Figure 94 for editing the connection parameters.
Start Capture/ Any communication between the PC and the OrionLX can be logged to a file for
Stop Capture analysis or tech support purposes. This button is a toggle button, i.e. either
Start Capture or Stop Capture is displayed. After clicking Start
Capture, the log file name and location on the PC’s hard drive must be
specified. While the communication is being logged, Stop Capture is
displayed. Clicking on it will stop the logging and close the log file.
Reset Clicking this option disables the current configuration file of the connected
Configuration legacy Orion. The type of currently connected Orion (Orion16, Orion5, or
Orion5r) must be specified. After the subsequent warm boot, the legacy Orion
will operate without the configuration file. This option can be used, for example,
if the current configuration file contains improper port or mapping parameters
that cause operation errors.
Disconnect Closes the current connection.

Table 69: NCD Comm Window

149
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Window Menu
If multiple configuration and communication windows are open, this option allows
▪ Cascading all windows
▪ Closing all windows
▪ Switching to one of the currently open windows

Figure 97: Window Menu

150
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Help Menu
The Help Menu provides access to the NovaTech product documentation file, protocol information as well
as version and system information regarding NCD. The information provided by these Help menu
selections may be required for technical support.

Figure 98: Help Menu

151
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Documentation

This option provides a link to the NovaTech documentation directory that contains the Orion user manuals,
protocol manuals, software manuals, field instructions, and tech notes.

Figure 99: Documentation File

152
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Protocol Information

This option provides a point count for all currently open configurations as shown below.

Figure 100: Protocol Information

Control Versions

Displays the information about the currently installed drivers.

Figure 101: Control Versions

153
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Program Versions

Displays the details of the currently installed software files for the support and operation of NCD.

Figure 102: Program Versions

154
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
System Information

Display of the information about the hardware, drivers, and operating system that make up the computer
system that is in use.

Figure 103: System Information

About

This option displays the NCD version information.

Figure 104: NCD Version Information

155
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

III.Orion Webpage
Introduction
When connected to a LAN or the Internet, the Orion provides a webpage for user settings and diagnostics.
All current web browsers are supported, including Internet Explorer (Version 9 and newer), Firefox, Chrome,
Microsoft Edge, Opera, and Safari. By default, the OrionLXm does not enable unsecured HTTP. Secure
HTTPS is enabled. To start working with the OrionLXm webpage, type https:// and the IP address of
the OrionLXm in the browser URL window. Example:

Figure 105: Connect with OrionLX

After connecting to the Orion via HTTPS, the browser may display a certificate warning. The Orion ships
with a self-signed key used for all encrypted communication including HTTPS. NovaTech does not include
a key file issued by a Certificate Authority (CA) such as VeriSign, because the Orion leaves NovaTech’s
control when shipped. Since the Orion key file is not certified by a Certificate Authority (CA), the browser
warns that an individual could have obtained the key file and could monitor network communications
between the PC and the Orion. For setting up keys, see chapter Key Management.

When using Microsoft Edge (Figure 106), this warning message will display. Click Advanced and then
Continue to <IP address> (unsafe) to proceed to the Orion login screen in Figure 109.

Figure 106: Microsoft Edge Security Warning

156
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
When using Chrome, the following warning message will display. Click on Advanced to display
additional information and a link to the Orion webpage. Click Proceed to <ip_address>
(unsafe) to proceed to the Orion login screen in (Figure 109).

Figure 107: Chrome Security Warning

When using Firefox, the following warning message will display. Click Advanced and
then Accept the Risk and Continue to proceed to the Orion login screen (Figure 109).

Figure 108: Firefox Security Warning

157
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Orion Login
After entering the username and password (Figure 109), the Orion homepage is displayed (Figure 110).
The tabs under the OrionLXm logo are the various main headings for diagnostics and settings.

Figure 109: Orion Login

Note: The tab headings shown may vary depending on the various protocol packages and options
installed on the Orion. The figures shown in the following figures represent the standard
tab headings.

Figure 110: Orion Homepage

To access the OrionLXm and make changes, click Unlock in the upper right corner. A window for entering
the password is displayed. After 30 minutes of user inactivity, the OrionLXm will automatically return to the
“Locked” state, which limits user operation.

158
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

Figure 111: Orion Unlock Prompt

Menu Function
Home View basic Orion information, including Serial Number, Orion Main Firmware Version,
Uptime, Active Configuration, Hostname, and Ethernet Address.
DataValues View and force values of Input and Output points by port.
Devices View and clear Poll and Response counters for each server device connected to the
Orion.
Alarms View and acknowledge alarms by point name, zone, etc.
Archive View archived values based on standard or custom filters, such as time, device, point
name, etc.
System Download system information, view key file with licensed options, reboot the Orion,
view version information, serial and Ethernet port statistics, and more information.
Logs Displays the log messages with time stamp and priority level (alert, critical, debug,
emergency, etc.) for identified programs.
Files Transfer files to and from the Orion including NCD configuration files, SVG, and update
packages, and system files.
Settings Configure Users, Authentication, Networking, Modem Settings, System, Firewall,
OpenVPN, Key Management, Services, Scheduler, Database Settings, and SVG
Settings.
Contact Provides NovaTech address, phone number, and email address.

Table 70: Orion Homepage Menu Items

The following chapters will discuss each tab on the Orion homepage in detail.

159
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Home Tab
The Home tab provides general information about the Orion including serial number, Distro version,
firmware information, uptime, active configuration, hostname, and Ethernet link information.

If user web graphics are used, a link to these graphics can be set up on the home page under User Links
on the right side (see chapter WebUI for more information).

Figure 112: Orion Home Tab

Item Description
OrionLX Serial # Each Orion has a unique serial number. This serial number is required
when requesting support from NovaTech. The serial number is also
found on the identification label on the Orion.
OrionLX Distro Displays the version of the Distro currently running in the Orion.
Version
OrionLX Firmware Displays the version of the firmware currently running in the Orion. More
Version information is available under the System tab.
OrionLX Firmware Date
Linux Version Displays the version of the Linux kernel currently running in the Orion.
OS Uptime Displays the time since the Orion Linux operating system has been
running in days, hours, minutes, and seconds. This will reset after a full
restart or after a power cycle.
Orion Process Uptime Displays the time since the Orion process has been running in days,
hours, minutes, and seconds. This will reset after a full restart, quick
restart, or power cycle.
Active Configuration The NCD configuration file that is currently running in the Orion.
Date/Time Current date and time as well as time zone.
Hostname The hostname is used to identify the Orion on the network. This is found
on the top right corner of every page. Using the hostname requires a
DNS server.

160
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Item Description
eth0 Shows the configured IP address for each enabled Ethernet port. Up to
eth1 five ports can be installed depending on the Orion model. If a port is
eth2 disabled, this information is omitted.
eth3
eth4

Table 71: Orion Home Tab

161
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
DataValues Tab
The DataValues page allows real-time viewing and forcing of each input/output point’s value and point
information on a port-by-port basis.

Each data point in the Orion will typically be displayed on at least two ports:
▪ The client port of the Orion that communicates with a server device and obtains the input point value
from that server device or sends the output point value to the server device.
▪ The server port of the Orion that communicates with a client station and sends the input point value to
that client station or receives the output point value from that client station.

The Orion maintains the value of each input point and each output point in the real-time database as a
normalized value, i.e. percentage of full scale. For complete details, see the Analog/Accumulator Scaling
Technical Note.

Forcing the value of input points and output points is available only if the logged in user has permission in
the Users settings. Forcing an input/output point means that the Orion will use the value(s) entered on the
Orion webpage as described below when communicating to the SCADA master (to which the Orion is a
server) or RTUs/IEDs (to which the Orion is a client) instead of using the values from live devices the Orion
communicates with. This is useful for testing, or when the Orion is installed and not all other devices or
communication links are available yet.

As shown on Figure 113, select the inputs or outputs of the port whose point values are to be monitored
or forced.

Figure 113: DataValues – Main Page

162
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
View Input Values
After clicking on inputs for a specific port, all the inputs on that port are displayed.

Figure 114: DataValues – View Input Values

Up to 30 input values can be displayed on one page and sorted by Point Name,Alias, Device, Type,
and Point Number. If more input points are mapped to the port, pagination allows browsing of the pages.
Points that are offline are highlighted in red to indicate an error. Points can be forced from the input page
by clicking the desired point name. If the point does not highlight when moving the mouse over it, the Orion
is Locked and needs to be Unlocked (see Figure 111) or the login account does not have the permission
to force inputs. The Users chapter provides information on setting user permissions.

The links First, Previous, Next, Last, and the page numbers enable browsing of the pages as follows.

Link Function
First Skip to the first page.
Previous Go to the previous page.
Next Go to the next page.
Last Skip to the last page.
Go to the specific page.

Table 72: DataValue – Browsing Pages

163
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Column Options

When viewing the DataValues/Inputs page (Figure 114), click the Column Options button to customize
the display by adding and removing columns. This drops down a list of all available columns to display with
the current columns highlighted in green. Click the heading name to select or de-select a column. Point
value notation (Decimal, Octal, Hex) can also be selected in this dropdown (Figure 115).
The Save Preferences option uses web client cookies to retrieve these settings. When the cookies
are cleared or a different machine is used, these settings will return to their default values. These settings
are universal for all ports. The Reset Selection button returns to the last saved settings which are
saved using cookies on the PC. The Remove Saved Preferences returns the display to the default
column selections.

When viewing the page for input values (Figure 114) or for output values (Figure 118), click
the Column Options button to customize the page by adding and removing columns from the default
display. The Column Options section lists all available columns that can be displayed as well as the point
value notation (Decimal, Octal, Hex) (Figure 115). The columns selected to be displayed are
highlighted in green. The column selection can be changed by clicking on the column name in the list, to
either add the column or remove the column from the current display. The Reset Selection button
returns to the last saved settings which are saved using cookies on the PC.
The Save Preferences option saves the changes made to the display. These settings are universal
for all ports. The Remove Saved Preferences button returns the display to the default column
selections.

Figure 115: DataValues – Column Options

The displayable columns are explained in the following table.

Column Description
Point Name Each point has two text descriptors for user identification. A Point Name, also known
Alias as Tagname, is required and usually describes the end device where the point
originates, such as Breaker424@HV Relay. An Alias is an optional descriptor
that is intended to display the SCADA master terminology, such as West Sub
Breaker 424 HV Relay.
Default: Point Name column is displayed, and the Alias column is not displayed.

164
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Column Description
Device Every point belongs to a device. This column displays the user defined device
name, such as HV Relay, and is convenient for sorting multi-dropped ports.
Default: Device column is displayed.
Type Protocol-specific point number and point type. Some examples of point types are
Point Number AI for Analog Input, BI for Binary Input. Depending on the protocol and the way it
addresses points, points may be numbered in hexadecimal (17h), decimal (23), or
octal (27o). The MMI will display the point address the way the specific protocol
addresses points. If there is a bit position within a word, the point number is
displayed as 17:03, which means bit 3 in word 17. Bit numbering and word sizes
are protocol dependent, i.e. bit 1 can be LSB or MSB, and a word can be 8 bits or
16 bits. The respective protocol manual provides additional information.
Default: Type column is displayed, and Point # column is displayed.
Changes Counter that displays the number of point changes since the Orion (re)start. For
analog or accumulator points, every data change increments the corresponding
change counter by 1. For digital points, every 0-1 or 1-0 transition increments the
change counter by 1.
Default: Changes column is not displayed.
Fails Counter that displays the number of failed polls since the Orion (re)start.
Default: Fails column is not displayed.
Successes Counter that displays the number of successful polls since the Orion (re)start.
Default: Successes column is not displayed.
Value Current value of the point as per communication with an end device. If the point
has been forced, the forced value will be displayed instead of the value from the
end device.
Default: Value column is displayed.
Percent Full Percent of full scale of the current value. For example, if the value is scaled from
Scale –2048 to 2047, and the current value is 1024, this file will show 0.75 for 75%.
Default: Percent Full Scale column is displayed.
Status If the corresponding value is updated from the remote device, the field will show
Online. If there is any type of communication error with the remote device, the
field will show Offline.
Default: Status column is displayed.
Forced No or Yes, depending on whether the value is obtained from the server device, or
overridden by a value entered on the webpage.
Default: Forced column is displayed.

Table 73: DataValues – Input Point Display Options

165
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Force Input Value
Forcing or overriding input values allows for the testing of the correct transmission of values to the client
polling the Orion, without having to generate those values in the end device in the field. The ability to force
inputs depends upon the user’s permission settings. Forcing inputs can be useful under several
circumstances:

▪ The end device and/or the communication to it have not yet been installed or are temporarily not
available.
▪ Generation of test values in the end device is too complicated or not possible, depending on the end
device.

To force a point, first select the port of the point that is to be forced (see Figure 114). After clicking on the
point, the following screen (Figure 116) will appear. If the Force Input Value display does not open, the
Orion may be Locked or the account used to login does not have permission to force inputs.

Note: If the desired point does not highlight when moving the mouse over it, the Orion may be
Locked or the account used to login does not have permission to force this point.

Figure 116: DataValues – Force Input Value

With this command, the Orion data point will indicate an equipment
state or condition to the SCADA master that is only simulated and does
not reflect the actual state or condition. This may lead the SCADA
master or personnel to initiate operations based on the simulated state
as opposed to the actual state. The necessary permissions must be
obtained from control center and other departments in accordance with
your corporate safety and operating guidelines. Failure to do so could
result in equipment damage, injury, and/or death.

166
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
By entering the following parameters, input data points can be forced to report those values.

Parameter Description
Force Value Enter a decimal number either a percentage or scaled value.
Scaled Value or In the drop-down box, select one of these two values:
Percent Full Scale ▪ scaled value
▪ percent full scale
Examples:
For a discrete value of 1 (On), enter either 1 and Scaled Value, or
100 and Percent Full Scale.
For an analog value of 6 with a scaling range of 0..10, enter either 6
and Scaled Value, or 60 and Percent Full Scale.
Comm Status The point can be simulated as being either Online or Offline.
Online indicates that the value is received online from the end
device. Offline indicates that there is no communication with the
end device, but rather the most recent value as of the time of the last
communication.
Time to Remain Forced Determines how long (in minutes) the point will stay in the simulated
state before returning to the actual value as obtained from the end
device.

Table 74: Data Values – Force Input Values

After entering the above parameters, clicking Force Value writes the entered value to the data point.
Clicking Cancel aborts the operation. Clicking Remove Forced Value clears the forced value on
this input point only.

Click the Clear Input Override link (Figure 114) to clear all forced values on all ports.

167
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Viewing Output Values
To view output values, i.e. values sent from a client station to an end device, click on outputs of the
desired port.

Figure 117: DataValues – Select Output Values

The last output value sent to the device will be displayed (Figure 118). This value may have been sent by
a client, to which the Orion is connected as a server, or the value may have been generated by logic running
in the Orion, or the value may have been forced by user input.

Figure 118: DataValues – View Output Values

Up to 30 values can be displayed on one page. Pagination is provided to allow jumping to different pages.
See Table 72 for a description of the pagination commands.

Chapter Column Options provides a complete description of the Column Options button.

168
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Force Output Values
This function sends output values to connected server/end devices as entered by the Orion. During normal
operation, any output commands sent to those devices would be issued by a front end/SCADA master, and
merely passed through by the Orion. This function can be used for localized testing without involving the
entire system end-to-end. The ability to force outputs depends upon the user’s permission settings.

Output points can be forced by clicking on the desired point name in Figure 118.

Note: If the output point does not highlight when moving the mouse over it, the Orion may be
locked or the login account does not have permission to force outputs.

This command can possibly operate live equipment on the end device,
the same way it would be operated locally, or from the front end/SCADA
master. The necessary permissions must be obtained from control
center and other departments in accordance with your corporate safety
and operating guidelines. Failure to do so could result in equipment
damage, injury, and/or death.

Clicking on the desired point displays the following screen.

Figure 119: DataValues – Force Output Value

169
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
The dialog shown in Figure 119 is a “generic” screen in that it shows all parameters possibly needed,
whether the output point is a simple discrete output, a select-before-operate output, a trip/close output, a
pulse output, or an analog output/setpoint. Depending on the protocols used to connect the front
end/SCADA master to the end device, only a selection of the listed types will be available, as either the
protocol between the front end and the Orion, and/or the protocol between the Orion and the end device
may not support all point types. The only value that must be entered is the value required by the point type.
The following table lists the parameters.

Item Description
Force Value Enter a decimal number either a percentage or scaled value.
Scaled Value or In the drop-down box, select one of these two values:
Percent Full Scale ▪ scaled value
▪ percent full scale
Examples:
For a discrete value of 1 (On), enter either 1 and Scaled Value, or
100 and Percent Full Scale.
For an analog value of 6 with a scaling range of 0..10, enter either 6
and Scaled Value, or 60 and Percent Full Scale.
Duration Usually, trip/close, raise/lower, and pulse outputs require a duration. If
(msec) none is entered, and a default value is used in the point configuration,
the default value is used instead.
Pulses For pulse output points, the number of pulses may be required unless
it is predefined by the respective protocol.
Offtime For pulse output points, the offtime between on-pulses may be
(msec) required as well.

Table 75: Data Values – Force Output Values

After entering the above parameters, click Force Value to perform the operation as set up.
Clicking Cancel aborts the operation.

170
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
View Tagging Archive
The View tagging archive link allows a user to determine whether or not any tags which may have
been created in the Orion HMI menus have been applied.

The View tagging archive link is located above the Clear Input Override link on the DataValues
WebUI tab. Click the View tagging archive link to display a summary for each tag entered. The
summary for each tag consists of the parameters described in Table 76.

Figure 120: DataValues - View Tagging Archive

Any tag which has been applied will result in an entry being created in the tagging archive. Once the entry
appears in the tagging archive, the user can remove the tag if desired. If a tag in the tagging archive is
removed, the archive will display a time stamp parameter indicating when the tag was applied and removed
(Figure 121).

Figure 121: DataValues - Applied Tags

171
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Item Description
Point Name The Point Name and the Device name are combined into the Tagname
which references the point within the port, as well as all other ports/protocols
where that point might be used. Using self-explanatory names facilitates
online monitoring of the OrionLXm’s operation. This string can be up to 50
characters long, and can contain all printable characters except @, [, ], ',
", =, and commas.
Alias Point Name Each point has two text descriptors for user identification. Name, also
known as Tagname, is required and usually describes the end device
where the point originates, such as Breaker424@HV Relay. An Alias is
an optional descriptor that is intended to display the SCADA master
terminology, such as West Sub Breaker 424 HV Relay.
Tag Type Generally, tags are identified by one of three types (or by user-specified
custom tags). The three default tag types are Do Not Operate,
Information, and Out of Service.
Applied Time Stamp Time stamp alerting the user to the moment the tag went into effect.
Removed Time Stamp Time stamp alerting the user to the moment the tag was released or
removed.
User Name User name required at login.
Comment Optional field. Comments can be used to alert the user to special
circumstances or instructions.

Table 76: Data Values - Tagging Archive

172
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Devices Tab
The Devices page displays communication statistics about all server devices attached to the Orion, i.e.
devices that are being polled by the Orion. The Reset All Counters link resets the Polls and Responses
counters for all devices to 0 (zero). The counters roll over a 2 32 (=4,294,967,296). Devices that are offline
are displayed with red background to indicate an error. If more devices are connected to the Orion than can
be displayed on one page, pagination allows browsing and jumping pages (see Table 72 for a list of
commands).

Figure 122: Devices Page

173
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Alarms Tab
The Alarms page shows all currently raised alarms in the Orion. The Alarms list can be sorted by clicking
the respective column headers. Alarms can be acknowledged individually by selecting a specific alarm
check box or collectively by clicking the select all check box at the top of the column, and then
clicking Acknowledge Selected . Point setup for alarming is described in the Alarm-Archive-Retentive
Software Manual. The colors for specific alarm levels and unacknowledged/acknowledged are set up as
described in chapter Alarms.

Figure 123: Alarms Tab

The active Alarm list can be sorted by clicking the respective column header. The Alarm list may also be
searched by entering text in the search box, upper right in window, and click the search button .

The display tables for the Alarms and Archive tabs can be customized to display only the desired set of
columns (Figure 124). Click the Column Settings button , select the columns to be displayed
(highlighted in green) for this table and click Apply Preferences . The customized settings only apply
to the user logged on and to the specific browser currently being used.

174
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

Figure 124: Column Setting Menu

The Alarm Archive list (Figure 125) can be filtered by clicking the Filter Table button and specifying a
Pointname, Message or Alias, and/or by specifying a date/time range in the filter options section, and
click the Add Filter button to add the option to the filter string and display the results. The following
figures show the unfiltered and the filtered Alarm/Alarm Archive.

Figure 125: Alarm Archive without Filter

175
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

Figure 126: Alarm Archive with Filter

176
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Archive Tab
The Archive page displays the periodic archived values and/or events for binary data changes and analog
data changes. The desired points are configured in the AAR Module in NCD. Binary events are displayed
when the value changes from On to Off or from Off to On. Analog events are displayed when they change
outside the defined limits. Binary and Analog values can also be configured to archive periodically, such
as every 15 minutes. The events can be viewed in their entirety, or filtered to the 1000 most recent records,
or filtered by clicking the Filter Table icon . Via Rows per page, the records can be viewed 10, 25,
50, or 100 records per page.

Figure 127: Archive - 1000 Most Recent Records

177
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Alternatively, the archive can be filtered by clicking the Filter Table icon and enter a Point Name
or Alias in the Search for data point… box and click the Add Filter button . The archive
table can additionally be filtered by selecting a time period from the Date dropdown menu (Figure 128).

Figure 128: Archive with Custom Filter

Trends can be viewed by clicking View Trending . In the following window (Figure 129), the points and
time period for the desired trend can be specified.

178
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

Figure 129: Archive –Trending

Item Description
Under Date, select the time period for which to display the trend. A
Custom time period can also be specified.

Under Point Name, select whether to search for Point Names or

their Alias. Then enter the desired name. The matching points are
displayed automatically for selection. To add a point to the trend, click
on the icon on the right side of the entry field. When the first point
has been added, the trend is displayed automatically.

The values of the currently displayed trend can be saved to the PC as

a CSV file.

Table 77: Trending Filters

All applied filters, such as time period and points, are displayed as shown in Figure 130 and can be removed
by clicking the X behind each, or altogether by clicking .

179
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

Figure 130: Archive – Trend for Multiple Data Points

180
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
System Tab
The System page provides viewing of the OrionLX system information such as:
▪ Operating System Information
▪ File System
▪ Module Versions
▪ Serial and Ethernet Interface
▪ Network Stats
▪ Memory Information
▪ Interrupts Information
▪ Package Versions

The System page also provides some maintenance and management tools:
▪ Download System information
▪ Restart the OrionLX
▪ Update Software Packages
▪ Backup User Configuration
▪ View Protocol License Key
▪ Download Key File
▪ Delete Key File

Table 78 describes the information displayed on the system pages.

Figure 131: System Page

181
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

Figure 132: System Page – File System and Module Version Information

Figure 133: System Page – Serial and Ethernet Interface

Figure 134: System Page – Network Stats

182
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

Figure 135: System Page – Memory Info

Figure 136: System Page – Package Versions

183
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Item Description
Uptime The time the OrionLX Linux operating system has been running, in
days, hours, minutes, and seconds. This will reset after a full restart
or power is reapplied.
Linux Version Version of the currently installed Linux kernel.
DataBase Database Enabled status display. Possible values are True or
False.
Download system info Compresses all system diagnostic log files into one .zip file. This file
can be transferred to the PC. NovaTech support engineers may
request this file to support the OrionLX.
Full Restart Force a hard re-start of the OrionLX
Update By clicking this button, software installed on the Orion can be updated.
Refer to the Updating Orion Image Field Instructions for a complete
description of the update process.
Core Dumps A core dump will be generated by the Orion if a program crash occurs.
The core file can be transferred to the PC by clicking on the date and
time stamp that is displayed. It is used by Technical Support to analyze
the OrionLX performance.
Backup When this button is clicked, the files to be backed up can be chosen:
▪ Sysfiles – Online settings and System Files listed on the Files
tab.
▪ Database – SQL tables including Archive/Alarm/Alarm Archive,
and tagging files.
▪ User Files – NCD, Logic, SVG and security Key files.
A compressed .zip file will be created containing the selected file
groups and is downloaded to the PC. See Appendix C - Backup and
Restore User Configuration for additional information.
Default: Sysfiles
View key file View all protocols that this Orion is licensed for. To check for protocol
library versions, scroll to the Package Versions table on the System
page (Figure 136).
Download Key File Transfers the Key File from the Orion to the PC.
Delete Key File Deletes the orion.ntk license key file from the Orion’s non-volatile
memory.
Note: The key file with the software licenses is required for the
Orion applications to run.
File System Display the status of the Orion file system, including overall size,
available space, mounting points, etc.
Module Versions Lists port, name, version, and date for all protocol drivers and the
main.exe running on the Orion. All Orion protocol packages can be
verified in this table.
Serial Ports Displays all serial ports, the number of bytes transmitted and received
on each port since the last boot, and the status of the RS-232 lines.
Ethernet Interfaces For each Ethernet port, the port’s name, MAC address, IP address,
and subnet mask is displayed.

184
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Item Description
Network Stats–Receive Displays the number of transmitted and received bytes, packets,
Network Stats–Transmit errors, etc. for each network interface since the last reboot.
/proc/meminfo Displays memory information.
/proc/interrupts Displays interrupt information.
Package Versions Displays the application packages and their versions which are
installed on the Orion.

Table 78: System Page Information

185
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Logs Tab
The Logs page displays the log information showing the entries time stamp, message source identifier,
and message priority (emergency, alert, critical, error, warning, notice, information and debug). The Logs
messages can be filtered by the message criteria Identifiers, Boot IDs, and Priorities. The
events meeting the selected criteria can be downloaded into a .csv (Comma Separated Values) file by
clicking Download.CSV . Additional details of a message will be displayed by clicking on the message
(Figure 138).

Figure 137: Logs Page

186
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

Figure 138: Log Message Details

187
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Files Tab
The Files page allows uploading, downloading, activating, and removing configuration files from the Orion.
This page also allows the transfer of system files and update packages. File transfers between the PC and
the Orion use the HTTPS/HTTP file transfer protocol.

Figure 139: Files Page

User Files

Files can be transferred to the Orion by clicking the + Select files... button and selecting the file
in the PC’s file system. Alternatively, files on the PC can simply be dragged and dropped onto the User
files area of the webpage. Click the Send button to transfer the selected files to the Orion (Figure
140). This process is used to restore a backup file to the Orion (see Appendix C - Backup and Restore
User Configuration).

188
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

Figure 140: Send Files to OrionLX

If a file selected for transfer has the same name as the active configuration, a warning
message is displayed. If the file is then actually transferred, the active configuration
will be overwritten and the Orion application process will automatically restart.

All available files are listed under User files. The following files can be transferred between the PC and
the Orion using the Files page.

File Extension File Use Description

.ncd Configuration file OrionLXm configuration file.
.bas Logic file Logic in “Basic” syntax executed by the OrionLXm.
.lua Advanced logic file Logic in Lua programming language.
.ncz Compressed file 61850, 61131, and SNMP Manager information.
orionlx.ntk Key file They key file specifies what protocol drivers a specific
OrionLXm is licensed to run. Protocols will not execute
without the proper license in this file. Contact
NovaTech support for troubleshooting.
.svg Scalable Vector Graphics file User webpages.
.js Java Script file User webpages.
.zip Compressed file Contains system files.

Table 79: Orion File Types

The listed files can be sorted by filename, size, and date by clicking the respective column headers
Filename, Size, and Date.

Clicking a file name opens the file for viewing. Files of type .ncd, .lua and .bas are displayed as ASCII text.
Files of type .svg are displayed as graphics.

189
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Each of the files can be selected by clicking the checkbox to the left of the file name. Then, either
the Download or the Delete button can be clicked, and the operation is applied to all selected files.

Clicking the Download button transfers all selected files from the Orion to the PC.

Clicking the Delete button deletes all selected files from the Orion non-volatile memory.

Selecting the Active Configuration

From all configuration files that have been transferred to the Orion, the active configuration can now be
selected from the drop-down box shown in Figure 141. A separate prompt requires confirmation for
switching to another configuration (Figure 142). Note that all files belonging to a configuration must have
been transferred to the Orion, such as .bas, .lua, .svg, etc. for the selected configuration and .ncd file to
operate correctly.

Figure 141: Select Active Configuration

Figure 142: Confirmation Prompt

190
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
System Files
The System files section includes system files parameters such as date and size (Figure 143). The system
files contain user-configured settings which have been set and saved using the Orion webpage. These
files can be moved from one Orion to another, assuming the logged in user has the appropriate permissions.
The files can be transferred to the PC as a compressed .zip file by clicking the Download all button at
the bottom of the list. System files cannot be transferred individually to the PC.

The System Files section allows sorting on Filename, Size, and Date by clicking the respective column
header. The sort will alternate between ascending and descending.

Figure 143: System Files

191
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Settings Tab
Configuration and system parameters such as user authorization, modem settings, alarms, or scheduling
can be set up on the Settings pages. All settings configured through these pages are saved on the Orion
and can be transferred to the PC for backup (see System Files). These settings can also be transferred to
a spare Orion instead of being manually configured on a spare Orion.

Figure 144: Settings Page

The following table provides an overview of available settings behind each link.

192
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Menu Function
Security
Users Manage users, set passwords and rights, allow services and operations,
account expiration, menu or command line upon login.
Authentication Rules Set User Lockout rules, Password rules, and Remote Root Login permission.
Remote Accounts Set Account Caching, Remote Account, LDAP, and Kerberos Authentication
parameters.
Firewall Set up firewall rules for receiving, sending, and forwarding of packets.
OpenVPN VPN client, server, and network settings.
Key Management Create, manage, and transfer keys in the OrionLX.
System Log Set system log destination and filters.
Hardware
Networking IP networking, IP address, port bonding, network bridging, and connection
settings.
Modem Set up internal modem on port D, and external modem or console on port B.
System Set time zone, IRIG-B Input/Output parameters, and NTP Time Sources.
Display (optional) Set up of direct video display options if the Multimedia Board (MMB) is installed.
Web Page
WebUI Set up webpage links, HMI tagging, and OrionLX webpage access rules.
Alarms Alarm notifications, alarm colors, and alarm archive settings.
General
Database Setup of archive, retentive, and tagging database and database access
management.
Tagging Setup and management of tags.
Cascaded Orions Settings for cascaded Orions.
Services Enable SNMP as well as Telnet, FTP, and HTTP (unsecure protocols).
Scheduler Set up recurring tasks in the Orion, such as emailing of .csv export files from the
archive and alarm database, and moving files via SFTP/FTP from the Orion to
a host computer.

Table 80: Settings Page

193
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Users
The Orion users are managed on the following page. The Orion is shipped with the two default users root
and novatech. Additional users can be added as needed.

Note that the following user administration pages are displayed only for users who belong to at least the
groups https (or http) and useradmin.

Figure 145: User Management Page

Function Description
Add User Click this link to add a user. Then the page in Figure 146 opens.
Edit the settings for this user.

Change the password for this user. See also Change Password.

Delete this user.

Table 81: User Management Commands

Note: NovaTech recommends creating new accounts and deleting the default novatech account.
Setting up a second administrator account to be used only in an emergency (e.g. when the
first administrator account has been locked out, or its password has been misplaced) is
strongly recommended.

194
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

Figure 146: Add User Page

Function Description
Username Enter unique user name for the new user.
Password Sets the user password. The password rules are configured on the
Verify Password Authentication Rules page.
Days valid Sets the number of days that the password is valid. Upon expiration, the
user will be prompted to enter a new password.

195
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Function Description
Login Type Defines the user interface provided by the Orion I/O after logging in over
Telnet, SSH, and serial connection.
Menu Display of Orion MMI. See Orion MMI for details.
Text Command line interface. Typing ntsh will display the Orion
menus from the command line.
iDial For communication with SEL AcSELerator Quickset ®. See
Orion iDial Software Manual.
Groups The groups the user is a member of. Each group grants certain
permissions to a user as explained in Table 83.

Table 82: User Account Management

Change Password

If the user that is logged in does not have the permission to manage users (useradmin), only the own
password can be changed. This is the only available option for users without user management
authorization.

Figure 147: Change Own Password

196
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Group Management

Note that access to any Orion webpage requires membership in group https or http. Figure 145 is
displayed only for users which belong to group https or http and useradmin.

Function Description LDAP

Group ID
alarming (1-5) The Alarming checkboxes are used with the Alarm/Archive/Retentive 116 - 120
option. These levels can be used to enable different users to
acknowledge different types of alarms. Up to 5 levels of
acknowledging alarms are supported.
Example: a breaker maintenance issue could be set up so only a
maintenance engineer can acknowledge, while a breaker status
change might be set up for only a relay protection engineer to
acknowledge.
The assignment of points to alarm acknowledgment groups is
described in the Alarm/Archive/Retentive Module Software Manual.
audio Allows the user to access the Multimedia -> Volume Control 29
application for the local audio output connected to the Multimedia
Board (MMB/MMC) installed in the Orion.
control (1-5) The Control checkboxes are used with the user webpage options. 121 - 125
These levels can be used to enable different users to send different
controls from a webpage. Up to 5 levels of controls are supported.
The assignment of points to control groups is described in the
WEBserver (XML Server) Software Manual, chapter "NCD Setup of
XML Server", "Outputs Tab".
cronconfig This group grants a user the ability to change the scheduled tasks on 128
the Scheduler page.
forceinput Allows the user to force inputs in the Orion through the diagnostic port 109
for debugging purposes (see chapter Force Input Value and Force
Input Values).
forceoutput Allows the user to force field outputs connected to the Orion through 110
the diagnostic port for debugging purposes (see chapter
Force Output Values and Force Output Values).
ftp Allows the user access to the Orion using FTP. 101
http Allows the user access to the Orion using HTTP and a web browser. 102
https Allows the user access to the Orion using secure HTTP and a web 103
browser.
modem Allows the user access to the Orion using the dialup modem over 105
PPP.
networkconfig Allows the user to modify and save network parameters on the 111
Network Settings page. This page can be viewed but not edited by
the users that do not have this box checked.
networksecurity Allows the user access to the Firewall page. This page cannot be 114
viewed by users that do not have this box checked.

197
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Function Description LDAP
Group ID
orionconfig Allows access to the Files page. This page cannot be viewed by 108
users that do not have this box checked.
packageinstall Allows the user to install updates on the Orion. 113
passthrough Allows the user to use the passthrough option under the system menu 115
via Telnet/SSH. Passthrough allows users to communicate with
devices that support ASCII protocols
postgres Checking this box will allow the user to set up the PostgreSQL 502
options.
ppp This group grants a user the ability to make a dial-in connection and 127
establish a PPP link using a modem
ssh Allows the user access to the Orion using secure shell. 104
tagging (1-5) Up to 5 levels of tagging for HMI use. 129 - 133
The setup of the tagging groups is described in chapter Tagging.
telnet Allows the user access to the Orion using Telnet. 106
tty Allows the user access to the Orion through the Ports A1 and A2. 5
useradmin Allows maintenance of this page (adding, deleting, and editing of user 107
accounts). This page cannot be viewed by users that do not have
this box checked.
video Allows the user to login to the local terminal connected to the 44
Multimedia Board (MMB/MMC) installed in the Orion.
viewlogs Allows the user to view system log files. This page cannot be viewed 112
by users that do not have this box checked.
webfiles This group grants a user the ability to view/add SVG pages on the 126
Orion.
wheel This group grants a user who has shell access (the login type Text) 10
the ability to become the super user (root).

Table 83: User Groups

For each category (alarm acknowledgment, control, and tagging), the matrix of each group and the users
assigned to each group must be carefully designed. The users must be able to perform their job functions,
and at the same time be prevented from operations they are not authorized to perform.

Each of the five groups of a category (alarm acknowledgment, control, and tagging) are disjoint groups and
not supersets of each other (like the groups superuser, administrator, power user, and user are in a
computer). This means that assigning a user to control groups 2 and 5 for example, grants permission for
operating control groups 2 and 5 only, and not for control groups 1, 3, and 4.

For more details, see also Orion Alarm/Archive/Retentive Software Manual.

198
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Authentication Rules
The Authentication Rules page sets the criteria for failed login results, valid password guidelines, and
remote Root user access. If any changes are made to the Authentication rules,
click Save changes button at the bottom of the page.

User Lockout Rules

User Lockout rules define the number of consecutive failed password attempts before a user account is
locked out or disabled. This is an important setting to prevent unauthorized users from gaining access to
the Orion.

Figure 148: Authentication Rules – User Lockout Rules

199
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Parameter Description
User Lockout Enable/disable lockout rules. When this setting is on, the Orion will use the
Rules following settings to decide when to disable a user due to failed login attempts.
Default: On
Max. Login Defines the number of consecutive failed password attempts before the user
Attempts account is locked out or disabled.
Default: 5
Lock Out Instructs the Orion to permanently disable a user account after a number of
Permanently failed attempts.
Default: Off
Time Until Unlock Defines the number of seconds the Orion will remain in lockout.
(sec) Default: 172800 seconds (2 days)
Temporary Lock The amount of time between failed attempts the Orion will lockout.
Time (sec) Default: 3 seconds

Table 84: User Lockout Rules

Password Rules

Password rules configure how many digits and the types of characters that are required in a password. A
long password with a mixture of uppercase, lowercase, numbers, and special characters is the most secure.
This password conformance check is executed when a new user is added or when a user changes the
password.

Figure 149: Authentication Rules – Password Rules

200
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Parameter Description
Password Rules Enable/disable password rules. When this setting is on, the Orion will check user
passwords to make sure they follow the rules defined below.
Default: Selected (On)
Min. Length Defines the minimum number of characters a password must be to be accepted.
Default: 8
Min. Digits Defines the minimum number of numeric digits (0-9) that must be used in a
password.
Default: 1
Min. Uppercase Defines the minimum number of uppercase (A-Z) letters that must be used in a
password.
Default: 1
Min. Lowercase Defines the minimum number of lowercase (a-z) letters that must be used in a
password.
Default: 1
Min. Special Defines the minimum number of special character digits that must be used in a
Chars password. Special characters include:
! @ # $ % ^ & * ( )+ ,- ./ :;< => ?“‘ [\ ]_ `{| }~
Default: 1
Max Repeated Defines the maximum number of times a character can be repeated.
difok Sets the minimum number of characters that must be different when changing a
password.
Default: 5
Password Defines the number of password changes before a previously used password can
History be reused.
Default: 3

Table 85: Password Rules

201
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Remote Root Login

If the Allow Remote Root box is checked, remote login will be allowed for the root user. However, the
root user will also need to be given remote login permissions as described in chapter Users. To do this,
the root user must be a member of the ssh group (see also Figure 146 and Table 83).

Figure 150: Authentication Rules – Remote Root Login

Note: For security reasons, enabling remote root login is not recommended.

202
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Remote Accounts
The Remote Accounts page (Figure 151) configures the remote authentication settings for Active Directory
and RADIUS. For a full description of the Active Directory or RADIUS setup of the Orion, see the Orion
Remote Authentication Tech Note.

Figure 151: Remote Accounts Page

203
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Firewall
The firewall is an important cyber-security tool since it is a first defense step to keep unwanted traffic from
entering the OrionLXm and its applications. The firewall is only one component which must be combined
with secure authentication and encryption methods as well as other security procedures to secure the
network and the devices connected to it.

The firewall provides a packet filtering process. Configuration involves establishing a list of rules based on
source and destination server IP address and port numbers. Rules will be set for Input traffic which will
have a specific IP address as an allowed source server and the OrionLXm IP address as the destination
server. Rules will also be set for Output traffic which will have the IP address of the OrionLXm as the
source server and a specific IP address as the destination server.

If Routing has been enabled using the Network Settings, data will be routed through the OrionLXm. In this
case rules for Forward traffic will need to be established where neither the source nor the destination
server is the OrionLXm but are device addresses within the network.

Generally, a firewall is set up to drop all incoming and outgoing packets. Exceptions are defined to allow
specific applications from specific machines to communicate with the OrionLXm and its applications.
Adding a comment to each rule is recommended so settings can easily be identified and modified later.

Figure 152: Firewall Settings

The Orion is shipped with the firewall disabled. The default setting is set to drop both input, output, and
forward packets. When configuring the firewall, the Input rules, the Output rules, and the Forward rules
must be modified. Since the Orion I/O cannot be configured as a router, the Forward rules do not need to
be defined.

Note: As a general practice, firewall settings should only be configured locally so that the firewall
can be disabled using the serial MMI interface if an incorrect rule is configured.

204
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
When first setting up a firewall, we recommend temporarily setting the output default to ACCEPT packets
while setting up the input rules to keep from having too many changes at once. Once the input rules function
properly, change the default for the output back to DROP, and then add the output rules.

The order in which rules are executed is important. If the firewall is configured to accept traffic from
26.45.123.54 and the next rule drops all incoming packets, this results in no incoming traffic being received.
If the first rule drops all incoming packets and the second rule accepts packets from 26.45.123.54, incoming
traffic will be received.

To set up the firewall of the Orion, rules must be added. Select the traffic direction tab and click
the Add Rule button (Figure 152) for each rule. After clicking the Add Rule button, click
the Edit button (Figure 153).

Figure 153: Firewall – Add Input Rule

Clicking the Edit button displays the following Filter Options webpage (Figure 154). To go to the
second page of the firewall Filter Options (Figure 155), click the button. After the filter options for this
rule have been specified, click Submit to establish the options for this rule. All filter options that are not
needed should be left empty.

To rearrange rules, drag and drop the rules into the desired order. After all rules have been configured, the
Enabled checkbox must be checked before clicking Save . The web browser will automatically refresh.
If the browser does not refresh within one minute, the OrionLX will turn off the firewall to enable the user to
modify the firewall rules.

205
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

Figure 154: Firewall Filter Options Page 1

Figure 155: Firewall Filter Options Page 2

206
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Function Description
Source
Interface The Interface setting specifies the Ethernet interface(s) to which this rule applies.
The available options are any (all interfaces), eth0, eth1, lo (loopback), and/or
tun0 (VPN tunnel).
The first list box allows choosing whether the selected interface is or is not
included in this rule.
Address Defines the IP source address of the incoming packet that is or is not included
in this rule.
Port Defines the source port number that is or is not included in this rule. A list of
preset port numbers is provided for convenience. Other port numbers can be
manually entered. Presets include:
FTP, SSH/SFTP, Telnet, HTTP, HTTPS, DNP, Modbus, NTP, OpenVPN, Radius,
Radius Account, PostgreSQL, LDAP, and Secure LDAP.
Destination
Interface The Interface setting specifies the Ethernet interface(s) to which this rule applies.
The available options are any (all interfaces), eth0, eth1, lo (loopback), and/or
tun0 (VPN tunnel).
Address Defines the IP destination address of the incoming packet that is or is not
included in this rule.
Port Defines the destination port number that is or is not included in this rule. A list
of preset port numbers is provided for convenience. Other port numbers can be
manually entered. Presets include:
FTP, SSH/SFTP, Telnet, HTTP, HTTPS, DNP, Modbus, NTP, OpenVPN, Radius,
Radius Account, PostgreSQL, LDAP, and Secure LDAP.
Common
Protocol The Protocol setting specifies the IP protocol (tcp, udp or icmp) that is or is
not included.
Default: TCP and UDP
State The Orion remembers the State of the connection. This setting defines the actions
based on the current state of the connection. Stateful packet inspection is important
to prevent exploitation of a device. Server (or server) protocols will utilize a state
setting, such as Established to keep a program from accepting a connection that
met all other firewall rules. The available settings are:
NEW A new connection is being created.
ESTABLISHED A current connection is established.
RELATED New connections created from previous connections.
INVALID Not new, established, or related.
Action and Additional Options
limit Specifies the maximum average number of matches per the specified time frame:
/seconds, /minutes, /hours or /day.
limit-burst Specifies the maximum burst before the limit parameter is enforced.

207
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Function Description
mac-source Defines the MAC address of the incoming packet that is or is not included in this
rule.
Action Action to take if the packet matches the rule.
NONE No action is taken.
DROP Drop the packet and do not send a reject message.
ACCEPT Accept the packet.
REJECT Drop the packet and send an ICMP error message back to sender.
LOG Accept packets and log packet information.
Default: NONE
Additional This is a command line option that requires advanced knowledge of firewalls. If
Options needed, this option will require assistance from NovaTech.
Comment Allows users to add a comment for the purpose of the rule.

Table 86: Firewall Settings

Note: It is possible to create a set of firewall rules that lock out the user during the Orion setup.
In this case, the USB interface port must be used to disable the firewall using the MMI
network menu.

OpenVPN
OpenVPN allows configuration of an encrypted tunnel for data exchange between the Orion and a client or
server. Protocols that do not use encryption, such as DNP3 and Modbus, have a secure SSL tunnel for
exchanging information when using OpenVPN. OpenVPN is an open source VPN package that can be
installed on Windows or Linux operating systems. This program can be downloaded free of charge at
http://openvpn.net/.

208
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

Figure 156: OpenVPN Settings

Common OpenVPN settings are used for both client and server modes.

209
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Field Description
Start On Boot For testing, it may be desirable to enable the VPN from the command prompt.
Once the VPN is set up properly, this box should be checked. This setting
applies to Client and Server.
Default: unchecked
Mode Configures the Orion VPN mode; Client or Server.
Default: Client
Protocol Configures the protocol used over the VPN; UDP or TCP.
Default: UDP
Port Defines the port number. 1194 is the registered OpenVPN port number.
Default: 1194
Cipher Defines the cipher algorithm used to cipher packets. Choices are: AES 128,
Blowfish, Triple-DES.
Default: AES 128
Enable Compresses data over the VPN tunnel.
Compression Default: unchecked
CA Defines the Certificate Authority file (.pem). This list is populated from the CA
files entered in the Remote Accounts page.
Default: default
Key Defines the Key file (.pem). This list is populated from the Key files entered in
the Key Management page.
Default: default

Table 87: Common OpenVPN Settings

Client OpenVPN settings are used when the Orion is initiating a VPN tunnel with a host.

Field Description
Host IP address of the host.

Table 88: OpenVPN Client Settings

210
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Server OpenVPN settings are used when a device is initiating a VPN tunnel with the OrionLX.

Field Description
VPN Network Defines the IP Address this server will occupy. IP address will be assigned to
clients based on this address.
Default: 10.8.0.0
VPN Netmask Defines the netmask for the VPN interface.
Default: 255.255.255.0
Redirect Gateway Automatically routes all IP traffic over this VPN.
Default: unchecked
Allow Client to Allows client-to-client connections.
Client Default: unchecked
Max Clients Defines the total concurrent clients that can tunnel to this Orion.
Default: 100

Table 89: OpenVPN Server Settings

Clicking Save changes saves any entered settings.

211
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Key Management
The Key Management page allows the creation of new keys, the uploading of them, and the associating of
SSL keys with system features. The OrionLX ships with a default key that is used for SSH and HTTPS.
NovaTech does not include a key file issued by a Certificate Authority (CA) such as VeriSign, because the
OrionLX leaves NovaTech’s control when shipped. The OrionLX’s self-signed keys cause most browsers
to generate a warning message.

The end user can obtain a signed key from a trusted CA, upload it by clicking Browse and Upload ,
and associate SSH and HTTPS with that key. Clicking Save saves any entered settings.

Figure 157: Key Management Settings

Field Description
Keys The Keys section shows the list of all SSL keys in the Orion. The key values
can be viewed by clicking the respective link under the Key Name heading.
Figure 158 shows the parameters associated with the default key. In order
to create a new key, click Create a new key, which requires the parameters
shown in Figure 159. See also chapter Create Key.
System Keys Allows users to select a specific key for SSH and HTTPS (Apache). The list
box will include all key files displayed in the keys section.
Key file upload Allows uploading of key files to the Orion.

Table 90: Key Management Settings

212
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

Figure 158: Default Key Values

213
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Create Key

After selecting the Create a new key link, a prompt allows the entering of the parameters of the
Distinguished Name. All fields must be entered. Once the parameters have been entered,
click Create Key to create the key. The new key will be displayed in the key list (see Figure 157).

Figure 159: Create New Key

214
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
System Log
If the system log or syslog function is set up, the Orion sends the system messages specified below to the
specified computer(s) for logging and analyzing. This function is used for system management and security
auditing.

Figure 160: System Log Setup

215
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Field Description
Enable Remote This box must be checked to enable the syslog functionality.
Logging
Host Address IP address of the syslog host computer.
Backup Host IP address of the computer that is the backup host computer.
Address
Destination Port Port number of the host computer which is used for syslogging.
Default: 514
Connection Type Connection type with syslog host computer.
Default: TCP
Filter Options Check all types of events for which messages shall be sent to the syslog host
for logging.
Default: alert, critical, emergency, error.

Table 91: System Log Setup

216
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Networking
The Networking page configures the installed Ethernet ports as well as General Interface Settings and
Advanced Networking Options. Once the Save changes button is clicked, these settings immediately
take effect. If the IP address of the OrionLX has been changed, the new address of the OrionLX must be
entered in the web browser for continued access to the Orion’s webpages.

Figure 161: Networking Settings

The internal names of the Ethernet ports which are labeled as Eth0, Eth1, etc. on the Orion enclosure are
as follows.

OrionLX Connector Label Interface Name

OrionLX-CPX ETH0 enp3s0
ETH1 enp3s1
OrionLX-CPX with -MMB ETH0 enp3s0
card
ETH1 enp3s1
ETH2 enp4s0

Table 92: OrionLX Ethernet Port Names

217
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
OrionLX+ Connector Label Interface Name
OrionLX+ (standard) ETH0 enp3s0
ETH1 enp4s0

OrionLX+ with -NC0 card ETH0 enp3s0

ETH1 enp4s0
ETH2 enp8s0
OrionLX+ with -NC1 card ETH0 enp3s0
ETH1 enp4s0
ETH2 enp8s0
ETH3 enp9s0
ETH4 enp10s0
OrionLX+ with -NC2 card ETH0 enp3s0
ETH1 enp4s0
ETH2-0 lan0
ETH2-1 lan1
ETH2-2 lan2
ETH2-3 lan3
ETH2-4 lan4
ETH2-5 lan5
ETH2-6 lan6
ETH2-7 lan7
ETH2-8 lan8
ETH2-9 lan9
ETH2-10 lan10
ETH2-11 lan11
OrionLX+ with -NC3 card ETH0 enp3s0
ETH1 enp4s0
ETH2 enp8s0
ETH3 enp9s0
ETH4-0 lan0
ETH4-1 lan1

Table 93:OrionLX+ Ethernet Port Names

218
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
General Interface Settings

The General Interface Settings settings affect all network adapters as follows.

Function Description
Hostname Optional name that identifies the OrionLX on a network. The DNS server must be
aware of this hostname and supply connecting devices with the IP address. This
name is also displayed on the OrionLX title bar for device recognition.
Default: orionlx
DNS Servers The Domain Name System (DNS) Server converts a hostname to an IP address.
The OrionLX supports two DNS servers. If no DNS is required for communications
to and from the Orion, it is recommended to leave the DNS server fields empty for
faster ssh connection times.
Enable Routing The Enable Routing setting allows the Orion to act as a router. When routing, the
Orion becomes the gateway between two networks. After selecting this option, the
user must configure the Orion IP address as the gateway addresses of the two
networks that the Orion is routing. The default gateway addresses of the OrionLX
Ethernet ports should be left blank.
Note: NovaTech recommends using the Firewall, Forward Settings when the
Enable Routing setting is selected.

Table 94: General Interface Settings

219
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Interface(s) Settings

For all network ports, the same set of parameters must be configured. All ports operate independently of
each other. In most environments, the IT department or networking engineering personnel must be
consulted to obtain specific addresses for the Orion’s network configuration.

Note: Each Ethernet port must belong to a different network and set up with corresponding IP
addresses. If network ports are set up with IP addresses belonging to the same IP
network, IP communication errors may occur.

Example 1: 192.168.x.x and 172.16.x.x are different networks.

Example 2: With subnet mask 255.255.255.128, the ranges 192.168.1.1 - 192.168.1.127 and
192.168.1.129 - 192.168.1.255 are different networks.

Function Description
Enabled Controls whether the Ethernet port is enabled (checked) or disabled (cleared).
Default: cleared (disabled).
Use DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) allows the Orion to obtain its IP
address from a DHCP server. Depending on the requirements and network setup,
the IP addresses can be assigned automatically through a DHCP server on the
network. However, unless the DHCP server is set up to assign a specific address
to the Orion, this will result in varying addresses assigned by the DHCP server. In
most network architectures, static IP addresses will be the preferred setup.
Default: Checked (DHCP enabled)
IP Address OrionLX static IP address for eth0, eth1, or eth2.
Example: 172.16.123.12
Subnet Mask The Subnet Mask is used to divide networks. Devices that communicate over a
network must have the same subnet mask. The corporate IT department or
networking engineering personnel normally provide the specific settings.
Example: 255.255.0.0
Gateway The Gateway setting allows the Orion to communicate with devices that are not on
the network. Commonly, the gateway is the IP address of the router. NovaTech
recommends using a gateway setting for one network interface only. If multiple
gateways are required, Static Routes may need to be configured using the
Advanced Networking settings.
Example: 172.16.0.1
Media Settings Defines the speed at which the Orion communicates over the network. auto
negotiate allows the Orion to connect at the optimal available speed. Selecting
a specific setting restricts this port to the selected speed and duplex mode.
Default: auto negotiate

Table 95: Network Settings for Ethernet Ports

220
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Advanced Networking

The following three advanced networking options are supported:

▪ Static Routing
▪ Network Bonding
▪ Network Bridging

Static Routing

Static routing is a manual configuration of a network route. It is used in situations where the network
parameters and configuration will remain constant. Packet routing decisions are preconfigured in the routing
table which can only be changed manually by the administrator.

Clicking the Static Routs link opens a new window where static routes can be configured.
Click Add to open the following window (Figure 162) to configure new static routes.

Figure 162: Add Static Route

Function Description
Destination Network Enter the IP address of the final destination.
Address
Destination Network Enter the subnet mask of the final destination.
Subnet Mask
Gateway Enter the gateway IP address which must be on the same LAN segment as
the OrionLX.
Interface Select the OrionLX Ethernet port for which this static route applies.

Table 96: Static Routing Parameters

221
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Network Bond(s)

Bonding provides a method for aggregating multiple network interfaces into a single logical bonded
interface. The behavior of the interface depends on the mode of operation that has been selected. Modes
provide hot standby or load balancing plus the option of link integrity monitoring. Clicking the Network
Bond(s) link opens a new window where a bonded port can be edited or configured. Click Add to open
the following window (Figure 163).

Figure 163: Ethernet Bonding Configuration

222
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Function Description
Use DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) allows the OrionLX to obtain its IP
address from a DHCP server. Depending on the requirements and network setup,
the IP addresses can be assigned automatically through a DHCP server on the
network. However, unless the DHCP server is set up to assign a specific address
to the OrionLX, this will result in varying addresses assigned by the DHCP server.
Note: In most network architectures, static IP addresses will be the preferred
setup.
(Default:DHCP enabled)
IP Address OrionLX static IP address for the logical bonded interface.
Subnet Mask The Subnet Mask is used to divide networks. Devices that communicate over a
network must have the same subnet mask. The corporate IT department or
networking engineering personnel normally provide the specific settings.
Gateway The Gateway setting allows the OrionLX to communicate with devices that are not
on the network. Commonly, the gateway is the IP address of the router. NovaTech
recommends using a gateway setting for one network interface only.
Mode Specifies the mode of operation of the bonded interface: See Table 98 for mode
descriptions.
▪ active-backup
▪ balance-rr (default)
▪ balance-xor
▪ broadcast
▪ 802.3ad
▪ balance-tlb
▪ balance-alb
Enslave Specifies the primary server port that makes the logical bonded interface specified
in the IP Address field.
MIIMON Specifies the MII link monitoring frequency in milliseconds. This is the frequency of
Frequency checking the link state of each server for link failure.
Default: 100 ms
Down Delay Specifies the time, in milliseconds, to wait before disabling a server after a link
Time failure has been detected. Valid with miimon link monitor only.
Default: 0
Up Delay Time Specifies the time, in milliseconds, to wait before enabling a server after link
recovery has been detected. Valid with miimon link monitor only.
Default: 0
Use Carrier Specifies the method that miimon uses to monitor link status. The 2 methods are:
▪ True - netif_carrier_ok (default)
▪ False - MII/ETHTOOL ioctls
Enable Controls whether the port bonding is enabled (checked) or disabled (cleared).
Default: checked (enabled)

Table 97: Network Bonding - Settings

223
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
The following table provides a description for the available bonded interface modes.

Mode Description
active-backup Operates in an active backup configuration. One interface will be in a backup
state and will only become active if the link is lost by the active interface. This
mode provides fault tolerance.
balance-rr Balanced round robin mode transmits packets in a sequential order starting
with the first available server through the last. This mode provides load
balancing and fault tolerance. (Default)
balance-xor Packets are transmitted on a server interface based on XOR formula using the
source MAC address XOR’d with the destination address. This mode provides
load balancing and fault tolerance.
broadcast All packets are transmitted on all server interfaces. This mode provides only
fault tolerance.
802.3ad Dynamic Link Aggregation which creates aggregation groups that share the
same speed and duplex settings. Requires a switch that supports IEEE
802.3ad Dynamic link.
balance-tlb Adaptive transmit load balancing mode. Outgoing traffic is distributed
according to current load and queue on each server interface.
balance-alb Adaptive load balancing mode which includes the balanced-tbl plus receive
load balancing. Receive load balancing is achieved by ARP negotiation.

Table 98: Bonding Modes

For more details, see the Orion Port Bonding Technical Note.

224
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Network Bridging

Clicking the Network Bridges link opens the page where the network bridge can be configured.
Click Add to open the following window (Figure 164) to configure a new network bridge.

Figure 164: Add Network Bridge

Function Description
Use DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) allows the OrionLX to obtain its IP
address from a DHCP server. Depending on the requirements and network setup,
the IP addresses can be assigned automatically through a DHCP server on the
network. However, unless the DHCP server is set up to assign a specific address
to the OrionLX, this will result in varying addresses assigned by the DHCP server.
Note: In most network architectures, static IP addresses will be the preferred
setup.
Default: cleared (DHCP disabled)
IP Address Enter the IP address of the final destination.
Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask of the final destination.
Gateway The Gateway setting allows the Orion to communicate with devices that are not on
the network. Commonly, the gateway is the IP address of the router. NovaTech
recommends using a gateway setting for one network interface only.
Bridge Specifies the interfaces that make the logical bridge.
Enabled Controls whether the network bridge is enabled (checked) or disabled (cleared).
Default: checked (enabled)

Table 99: Network Bridge Parameters

225
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Modem
The OrionLX offers modem support on two ports; the optional built-in Internal Modem on port D (Figure
165), and on Port B (Figure 166) for external modems or direct connect (not dial-up). The OrionLX+
only supports an external modem on Port B (Figure 166). The same modem settings can be set for either
port. The modem settings for the internal modem are listed in the MultiTech MultiModem & SocketModem
MT9234 Series manual. When using an external modem, refer to the external modem’s user manual for
any information needed for setting up this modem, such as initialization strings. The entered settings
become effective after clicking Save changes .

Figure 165: Internal Modem Settings

226
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

Figure 166: External Modem Settings

227
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Field Description
Enabled To enable the modem port (port D or Other Port), the respective Enabled
checkbox must be checked. Parameters cannot be set/edited on a disabled port.
Default: Unchecked
Comm Port Serial Port selection for port B, external modem, or other serial port for direct
communication connection.
Default: Port B
Direct (not This option can be checked only for port B if the port is used for a direct connection,
dial-up) i.e. without a modem. If port B is set up for use as a modem port, then this box
must not be checked.
Default: Unchecked
PPP IP Address This is the IP address that the PPP server on the Orion will assign to the PC that is
dialing in to the Orion on that particular TTY port. This must be in the same range
as the PPP Server IP Address, and cannot match the ranges of any other
network interfaces.
PPP Server IP This assigns the IP address to the OrionLX PPP server. This must be in the same
Address range as the PPP IP Address, and cannot match the ranges of any other network
interfaces.
Port Speed Select the baud rate between port B and the external modem from the drop down
box.
Default: 115200
Use DTR to When checked the Orion uses the DTR line to reset the modem. Using DTR to
reset modem reset the modem is highly recommended.
Default: Checked
Hold the DTR Amount of time the DTR line is low when resetting the modem.
line low Default (milliseconds): 500
Init Chat Enter the modem initialization commands and expected response strings as per
the modem manufacturer manual. This field is space delimited.
Example: "" AT&F OK ATV1X0&D2E0S0=0 OK
“” instructs the OrionLX that no response is expected. AT&F is then sent to the
modem with OK as the expected response. ATV1X0&D2E0S0=0 is then sent to
the modem with OK as the expected response.
Force Init Enter the force init chat string as per the modem manufacturer manual. In some
Chat cases, a modem can get stuck in a mode where it won't accept simple AT
commands. Usually this happens because the modem is set to ignore the DTR line
and still has a data connection to the other side. To get the modem back to a known
state, use the force-init-chat chat sequence.
Example: “” \d+++\d\d\dATH0 OK
The example pauses, sends the +++ escape command, then ATH0 to get the
modem back to command mode.
Post Init Chat Enter the post init chat string as per the modem manufacturer manual.
Some modems forget parts of their settings when switching modes during modem
initialization. For these modems, you can use this command to send AT commands
after initialization has completed.

228
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Field Description
Modem Check The Orion checks with a simple AT…OK sequence to determine if the modem is still
Time alive and responding as specified. If not, the Orion modem driver will perform a full
modem reset.
Default (seconds): 3600
Number of Specifies the number of rings after which the Orion instructs the modem to answer
Rings when being called from the outside.
Default: 2
Answer Chat Enter the answer chat string as per the modem manufacturer manual. This is the
command sequence used to answer a phone.
Example: "" ATA CONNECT \c
Answer Chat During the answer-chat, each expected string must be seen in the time specified
Timeout here. This time should be at least 5 seconds longer than the time set with the
|ATS7=...| modem setup command.
Default (seconds): 80
Autobauding Some modems switch their DTE line speed to the communication line speed after
connecting, e.g., after sending CONNECT 2400, the modem switches to 2400 bps.
Newer modems usually have a switch to "lock" a DTE baud rate, which is strongly
recommended. If the connected modem switches the speed, checking
Autobauding will set up the Orion modem driver accordingly.
Default: unchecked
Ignore Carrier If the connected modem does not assert the DCD (carrier detect) line, or the serial
port, cable, or serial driver is broken, it is possible that the connection will “lock”
after a successful CONNECT. In this case, there are no immediate error
messages, but nothing is sent to the port anymore. This can happen before printing
the ‘/etc/issue' file or after printing the ‘password:' prompt. To work around this,
carrier detection can be ignored.
WARNING: When using this option, the system will not be able to detect when a
caller just hangs up instead of cleanly logging out. This may result in hanging
modems, etc.
Default: Unchecked (carrier detection not ignored)
Login Time This specifies the maximum time the user can take to log in. If no login has occurred
after that time, the OrionLX modem driver will hang up the phone.
Default (seconds): 240

Table 100: Modem Settings

229
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
System
The system settings configure system time parameters including IRIG-B Input, IRIG-B Output, and NTP
settings.

Figure 167: System Settings

Field Description
Time Zone Defines the Orion time zone. The Orion will use this time zone
setting for user interface time values, except for log files. Protocols
that use time provide an offset for multi time zone systems. If
daylight savings time is undesirable, use the Greenwich Mean Time
(GMT) or Universal Time Coordinated (UTC) offset zones.
Click Save to save the setting.

230
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Field Description
IRIG-B Input Settings
Signal Type Defines what type of IRIG-B signal the OrionLX will receive.
Unmodulated is an AC signal and Modulated is a DC signal.
Default: Unmodulated
Timezone Defines how the Orion will interpret the incoming IRIG-B signal. If
UTC is selected, the Orion will apply the time zone setting to the
incoming time before using it. If Local is selected, the OrionLX will
use the exact time received.
Default: UTC
IRIG-B Output Settings
Output Mode Defines whether the IRIG-B output signal will be Generated by
the Orion or whether the Orion should Use input signal. Use
input signal produces a signal with less jitter since the Orion
does not have to regenerate the signal.
Default: Generated by the Orion
Time Zone Defines how the Orion will send the outgoing IRIG-B signal. If UTC
is selected, the Orion will apply the time zone setting to the signal
before sending. If Local is selected, the Orion will send the exact
time of the Orion. Click Save to save the setting.
Default: Local

NTP Time Sources Network Time Protocol (NTP) is a very accurate network protocol for
setting the Orion time. The Orion can receive both IRIG-B and NTP
messages. Commonly, a hostname or IP address is entered.
Several hostnames are provided, but usually the NTP Server is a
GPS clock or server on the network. Hosts can be added by typing
the hostname or IP address and clicking Add . After saving, the
new entry will be displayed in the list box. The Delete button
allows deletion of individual hosts.
Remote Host Select to Enable NTP For All Remote Hosts setting which
will allow other devices to receive timing from this Orion.

Table 101: System Settings

231
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Display
On the display setup page, the direct video interface of the OrionLX-CPX Multimedia Board (MMB) option
and the OrionLX+ Multimedia Card (MMC) can be edited. Factory default settings have the direct video
port active and available to factory default users at initial power up of the equipment. See Orion Direct
Video chapter for operational information about this OrionLX direct video options.

Figure 168: Direct Video Display Options

232
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Parameter Description
Local Login
Auto Login If Auto Login is checked, the designated user (see Username parameter) is
automatically logged in to the desktop access using the video port. User login
to the OrionLX is still required.
Each OrionLX webpage can be configured for “login”, “unlock”, or “no login” as
described in chapter Sections.
Default: Disabled
Username For Auto Login, a user account must be selected from all available users.
Only users which are set up with video group login permission are displayed
in this list. The video group login permission is set on a per-user basis as
described in chapter Group Management.
Default: novatech
Delay Time The Delay Time is the waiting time between accessing the login window and
the execution of the auto login. Valid range is 5 to 60 seconds.
Default (seconds): 0
Power
Screen Lock Determins how the display returns from the power saving sleep mode. With
Screen Lock enabled, the user is required to login to the Web Browser. With
Screen Lock disabled, the Web Browser returns to the screen displayed prior
to sleep mode.
Default is enabled (selected).
Turn Off The Turn Off Display time specifies the inactivity time, after which the
Display screen is turned off. Any keyboard or mouse activity turns the screen on again.
Enter 0 to prevent the display from sleeping.
Default (minutes): 15

Table 102: Display Options

233
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
WebUI
On the WebUI page, the following settings related to the OrionLX’s webpages are entered. All settings
become effective by clicking the Save button at the bottom of the page.

Figure 169: WebUI Setup

234
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Login Message

By default, no custom text is shown on the OrionLX’s initial login page. Custom text (Example: “Welcome
to Desert Road Substation!”) can be entered in the Login Message text field, as shown above (Figure
169), which is then displayed as shown in Figure 170.

Figure 170: Custom Login Message

Database

Specifies the user group that has access to database management actions.

Sessions

Sets the amount of time in minutes that user inactivity on the Web UI will result in user logout. Factory
default is 1200 minutes (20 hours). This parameter increments in 1 minute steps to a maximum of 44640
minutes (744 hours/31 days).

HMI

In the HMI section of the setup page, the following settings are available.

Field Description
Use large text in If this box is unchecked, the header bar is displayed as shown in Figure 171.
the header bar and If the box is checked, the header bar is displayed as shown in Figure 172.
link bar on HMI
Display tagging Tags can be set up as described in chapter Tagging. When executing control
button and operations in the HMI dialog, the respective tags can be displayed as part of
information in HMI the confirmation screens. If this is desired, this box must be checked (Figure
control dialog 173). Otherwise, this box must be unchecked (Figure 174).

Table 103: HMI Setup Parameters

235
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

Figure 171: Small Text in Header and Link Bar

Figure 172: Large Text in Header and Link Bar

Figure 173: Control Dialog with Tag Information

Figure 174: Control Dialog without Tag Information

236
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Inactive Redirect

You can select a webpage for the Orion to automatically display after a set period of user inactivity. The
Orion can be set to redirect to a commonly used page, such as a oneline SVG page. The redirect
functionality is only supported on OrionLX pages.

Figure 175: Inactive Redirect Parameters

This functionality is not enabled on the Orion by virtue of the default value 0 (zero) minutes. To enable the
inactive redirect functionality, configure the following settings in the Inactive Redirect section of the
WebUI Settings page (see Figure 169).

Field Description
Auto redirect after user Enter the number of minutes following user inactivity before the
is inactive for Orion redirects to the specified page.
Default: 0 (zero), disabled
Redirect Address Enter the file path of the destination page. Do not include the IP
address or domain name in this file path. For example, enter
/SVG/One-Line.svg/ to redirect users to the Oneline SVG
page of the OrionLX.

Table 104: Inactive Redirect Parameters

The Inactive Redirect timer does not restart following an automatic logout. For example, if the
Inactive Redirect timer is set to 15 minutes and the User sessions time out timer is set to 10
minutes, the redirect timer does not restart following the logout at 10 minutes. Instead, the redirect occurs
15 minutes following the most recent user activity.

237
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Web Files

Immediate links to user-defined SVG files can be displayed on the Home page under User Links (Figure
177). Each file that requires a link on the home page must be checked as shown below (Figure 176).

Figure 176: Set Link to User-defined .svg File

Figure 177: Link to User-defined .svg File

238
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Link Bar

Above the blue OrionLX banner, links can be set up for immediate access to the linked pages (Figure 178)
when Show link bar is selected in the Sections setup. As shown in Figure 179, the link names must be
entered in the Name column, and the OrionLX directory of the respective .svg file must be entered in the
Address column. Click Save after entering each link.

Figure 178: Link Bar Example

Figure 179: Link Bar Setup

239
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Sections

Each section has three parameters that can be customized; the dropdown box for access setting, Hide
header, and Show link bar. Clicking Add rule will allow additional access rules to be defined for
specific IP address or CIDR address range. If no rules or parameters are defined for a section, the default
settings for each parameter will be used. After all of the parameters are set and the rules have been added
for the sections, click the Save button located on the bottom of the webpage.

Note: The HMI section is available only if the XML Server protocol is configured.

Figure 180: Webpage Access Security and Display Options

240
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Control Box Description
By default For each section (Home, Files, System, etc.) of the OrionLX, default access
(dropdown list) can be set (login, unlock,…).
Additional rules can be added by clicking the Add rule button. For each
section, multiple rules can be specified. Each rule determines whether
accessing that section of the OrionLX from the specified IP address or CIDR
block, no_login, login, or unlock is required. Access to that section can
also be disabled altogether by selecting deny for the specified IP address or
CIDR block (see the dropdown box in Figure 180). To remove a rule, click
the Delete button associated with that rule.
Hide header If this box is checked, the OrionLX webpage header which consists of the blue
banner and the tabs (Figure 181) will not be shown when the respective section
page is displayed. The header will also be hidden from any pages linked from
the main section page.
Show link bar If this box is checked, the user link bar will be shown on the respective section
page (Figure 181). The link bar will also be shown on all pages linked from the
main section page.

Table 105: Section Parameters

Show Link Bar

Hide Header

Figure 181: Link Bar and Header Settings

After all changes have been completed, click the Save button.

241
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Alarms
For alarms, the visual and audio notifications, and colors can be specified. Refer to the
Alarm/Archive/Retentive Module Manual for setting up data points for alarming.

Figure 182: Alarm Notification and Color Settings

242
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Notifications

For unacknowledged alarms, the following options can be specified. Refer to Alarms Tab for acknowledging
alarms.

Control Box Description

Show warning If this box is checked, a warning banner will be displayed if there are any
banner unacknowledged alarms.
Show most recent If this box is checked, the most recent alarm will be displayed if there are any
alarm in banner unacknowledged alarms.
Play If this box is checked, the specified alarm sound (alarm1, alarm2, alarm3,
<alarm sound> alarm4, or alarm5) will be played at the specified interval.
every <x>
seconds

Table 106: Notification Parameters

Colors

The colors for normal values, alarm values, and acknowledged alarms can be defined using standard colors
or custom colors. The colors can be entered either by text name as shown in Figure 182 or by the respective
six-digit hex code. For example, #FF0000 represents red.

243
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Database
The following database operations work in combination with NCD configuration for archiving, retentive data,
and/or alarming (see Alarm/Archive/Retentive Module Manual). For the user to have access to these
database actions, they must be assigned to the postgres users group.

Note: For all database operations (such as Reset database), the database must be enabled.
The database is enabled when the link Disable database is displayed as shown below
(Figure 183).

Figure 183: Database Settings

Function Description
Enable Database Activate or deactivate the database.
Disable Database Default: the database is disabled.
Reset Database Deletes and recreates all database tables. All data in the database will be
lost. The database must be enabled for this operation to be available.
Analyze Database Collects statistics about the contents of tables in the database. The query
planner uses these statistics to help determine the most efficient execution
plans for queries. Using this feature for large databases optimizes the query
response time. The database must be enabled for this operation to be
available.
Allow remote When this box is checked, the database server will listen on TCP/IP port
database access 5432 (on all interfaces) for connections and provide access.
Click Save to make the setting permanent.

244
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Function Description
Add When connecting remotely to port 5432 using a client such as pgAdmin, or
a driver such as psqlODBC, a username and password must be specified
to connect. This option permits access for the specified database users.
When clicking this button, the following window is displayed (Figure 184).
The respective username and password must be entered. The checkboxes
for the desired access (archive, retentive, tagging) must be set as
well.
Delete Clicking on this link to the right of a database user name removes that user’s
account.

Table 107: Database Settings

Figure 184: Add Database User

245
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Tagging
For tagging of equipment, the OrionLX provides the following three standard tags.

Tag Name Description Permis- Disable Display

sion Output Value Group
Do Not Operate Place on devices to inhibit operation. 1 0 1
Information Place on devices to give information. 1 None 2
Out of Service Place on devices that are out of 1 Both 3
service.

Table 108: Standard Tags

The meaning of Permission, Disable Output Value, and Display Group is explained in Table
109.

Additional tags can be added by clicking Add tag type on the following page (Figure 185). The page
shown in Figure 186 will be displayed.

Figure 185: Tag List

246
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

Figure 186: Add New Tag

Field Description
Name Name of the new tag.
Description Description of the purpose of the new tag.
Disable control This parameter sets which output values will be disabled when the tag is
value applied to the individual control. The options available in the drop down
menu are:

Parameter Description
none This parameter would be used for Information only type
tags. Neither control will be disabled with this selection.
both This is the most restrictive parameter. The control will
not be able to be turned on or off.
0 An output value of 0 will be disabled if this option is
selected. Depending on how the operation of the control
is defined, this parameter could turn the control on or off.
1 An output value of 1 will be disabled if this option is
selected. Depending on how the operation of the control
is defined, this parameter could turn the control on or off.

Permission There are five permission groups set up in Group Management, called
tagging1, tagging2, etc. The operator who is setting the tag must
belong to the specified group.

247
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Field Description
Display Group The display group can be 1 through 16. This option corresponds to the
Tagging Visibility Group that is set on the Orion HMI Inkscape
Extension.
Additional Fields The additional fields are optional. If left empty, no additional fields will be
displayed (Figure 188). If additional fields are needed, they can be added
by clicking + and filling in the desired text labels. In the above example,
two fields called Tester Name and Tester Phone Number have been
added. When the tag is used, those additional fields are displayed as
shown in Figure 189.

Table 109: Tag Fields

Note: Using the tagging feature requires that the Alarm/Archive/Retentive (AAR) module is
configured in the NCD file, even if the point to be tagged is not configured for AAR. Without
the AAR module running, tagging does not work.

For taggable equipment, the Tagging button must be inserted in the .svg graphics next to the
equipment (Figure 187). Clicking the button opens the tag window shown in Figure 188.

Figure 187: Tagging Button in Graphics

All existing tags for the associated data point are displayed below the data point’s name on the left hand
side. Existing tags can be removed by clicking the respective Remove tag button.

For adding a new tag, select the desired tag type from the dropdown box, fill out the Comment field and
other fields if available (see example in Figure 189). Then click Apply Tag for the tag to become
effective.

248
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

Figure 188: Setting a Standard Tag

Figure 189: Setting a Custom Tag

249
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Cascaded Orions
When several Orion’s are cascaded, the NCD configurations for the server Orion are generated on the
following screen of the client Orion by clicking Save and Make Active . The client Orion in turn, has
been set up accordingly in NCD (Figure 58).

A complete description of setting up a cascaded Orions is available in the Cascading Software Manual.

Figure 190: Cascaded Server

250
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Services
The Services page enables/disables SNMP and the unsecure protocols that are disabled by default. Each
of these protocols has a secure equivalent that is enabled in the OrionLXm by default. SSH replaces Telnet,
SFTP replaces FTP, and HTTPS replaces HTTP. After clicking the Save changes button, any changes
will immediately take effect. Enabling SNMP requires additional configuration as described in SNMP
Manager Software Manual.

Figure 191: Services Settings

251
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Scheduler
The Scheduler page allows the scheduling of various tasks to run at user-specified intervals. Multiple tasks
may be run concurrently. Only users who belong to the cronconfig group (see Users) can access this
function.

Figure 192: Scheduler – Task List

Field Description
Restart Cron Daemon Click this button after adding new tasks, or editing or removing existing
tasks.
Add CSV Task Add a CSV task as described in Scheduling Tasks and Add CSV Task.

Add FileMover Task Add a FileMover task as described in Scheduling Tasks and Add
FileMover Task.
Add Config Manager Add a Configuration Manager Agent task as described in Scheduling
Agent Task Tasks and Add Config Manager Agent Task.
remove When clicking this link next to a task, the task will be removed and will no
longer be executed.
Task (such as When clicking the task’s link, the task is opened for editing.
CSV File Generator)

Table 110: Scheduler – Task List

The hwclock task is the hardware clock task that keeps the time synchronized. This task should not be
removed and is not available for editing.

252
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Scheduling Tasks

The scheduling procedures for CSV tasks and FileMover tasks are identical as shown in the following figure.
The task-specific setups are outlined in the respective chapters Add CSV Task, Add FileMover Task, and
Add Config Manager Agent Task.

Figure 193: Task Scheduling

Field Description

Task Information

Task Description Required input to assign a task name.

Schedule Date/Time

Designates how often the task should run. There are options for Month, Day of Month, Day of
Week, Hours, and Minutes. If all options are selected (which is the default), the task will run every
minute of every hour of every week and every day of the month and every month. The intervals can be
set in detail using the following controls.
If invalid parameters are selected, a notification message will appear when saving the settings.
Month Select individual months or all months in which the task is to be run.
Default: all months
Day of Month Select specific days or all days of the month for the task to run.
Default: all days of the month
Day of Week Select specific days or all days of the week for the task to run.
Default: all days of the week

253
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Field Description
Hours Select the hour of the day the task should run in military time.
Default: all hours
Minutes Select the minutes past the hour for the task to run.
Default: every minute
Repeat Value Select how often the task should be repeated, relative to month, day of month,
day of week, hours, and/or minutes.
Default: No Repeat.

Table 111: Task Scheduling

The following two examples show two tasks. The first task (Figure 194) is run daily at 00:05, and the second
task (Figure 195) is run every three hours. Figure 196 shows the task list with those two tasks.

Figure 194: Task Example – Daily at 00:05

254
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

Figure 195: Task Example – Every Three Hours

Figure 196: Task List Example

Add CSV Task

With the CSV task, portions of the Archive or Alarm database can be emailed. The CSV task parameters
are set up on the following page. Any changes on this page must be saved by clicking the Save button.

255
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

Figure 197: CSV Task Parameters

The .csv files generated by this task are saved to one of two directories, depending on the database being
used. Files generated using the Archive database are saved to the
/var/cache/csvFileGenerator/archive directory on the Orion. Files generated using the Alarm
database are saved to the /var/cache/csvFileGenerator/alarmArchive directory.

The naming conventions for the generated CSV file use the format <Date>,<Time>,<Time Zone
Code>,<Name describing CSV file>.csv. In addition, if the Use device date/time setting is
enabled, a “t” character is included following the time stamp. For example, a file with the text “Sub237” in
the Name describing CSV file field that was generated on July 19, 2016 at 10:29:55,936 with the
Use device date/time setting enabled has the filename 160719,102955936,+02h00t,
Sub237.csv.

Field Description
Database Designates whether the CSV file will contain data from the Archive or from
the Alarm database.
Maximum file size Minimum file size is 10 Kbytes, and maximum file size is 500000 Kbytes.
Default: 20000
Maximum files This is the number of files that will be saved before the files begin to be
deleted to make room for new files.
Default: 60
Use device Uses the date and time information gathered from the specific device rather
date/time than using the OrionLX information.
Email CSV To utilize the emailing function, check the Email CSV box which will enable
Email to group the Email to group field. In this field, enter the name of the group that
data should be emailed to. The email groups are configured in NCD. For
instruction on how to configure an email group in NCD, see the Email
Software Manual.
Name describing CSV The content of this field will be used as the “Subject” of the email.
file

Table 112: CSV Task Parameters

256
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Add FileMover Task

With the FileMover task, files in the OrionLX can be transferred to a host computer using FTP or SFTP.
The FileMover task parameters are set up on the following page. See the Orion FileMover Tech Note for
an example.

Figure 198: FileMover Task Parameters

Field Description
ftp sftp Select the protocol for the file transfer.

Source
Path Path in the OrionLX file system of the file to be transferred.
Private Key Path to the private key file used for encrypting the transferred file. This is
only needed when using SFTP.
Destination
IP Address IP address of the host computer to which the file is transferred.
Port Port of the host computer used for file transfer.
Path Path in the host computer file system where the transferred file is stored.
Username Username for login at the host computer.
Password Password for login at the host computer.
Delete on success If this box is checked, the specified file will be deleted in the OrionLX file
system upon successful transfer to the host computer.

Table 113: FileMover Task Parameters

Click the Save button to save any changes.

257
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Add Config Manager Agent Task

The Configuration Manager Agent creates a .zip file containing configuration information of the OrionLX.
The agent scans the configured ports using the command list specified in the NCD file, captures additional
information from the Orion, and packages the results into a ZIP file on the Orion. See the Configuration
Manager Agent section for information about configuring the software agent in NCD.

Figure 199: Schedule Config Manager Agent Task

Enter a Task Description and schedule the date and time for the task to run. Click Save to enter this
task on the schedule.

258
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

IV. Orion MMI

Introduction
The Orion provides a built-in MMI for viewing data values, port communications, device statistics, system
events, and system/version information. It also allows configuration file, firmware file, and log file transfers
via Z-Modem (bi-directional), as well as passthrough to connected relays and meters. This allows use of
the respective manufacturer’s programming software to configure the relays and meters, retrieve event
information, etc.

The OrionLX-CPX’s dedicated MMI port is port A1 over a serial RS-232 connection or USB port A2 over
the USB A/B cable. Additional serial ports on the OrionLX can be set up as MMI ports if needed. For
example, if viewing in different locations is required, or if multiple aspects of the MMI are to be viewed at
the same time.

The OrionLX+ dedicated MMI port A is the USB B connector using the USB A/B cable which is shipped
with the Orion.

In addition, the same MMI with the same functionality is available for access by way of SSH and the
OrionLX’s Ethernet port(s). Again, multiple MMI windows can run simultaneously.

Using the MMI requires NCD (NovaTech Configuration Director) software or a standard terminal or SSH
software in order to make commissioning, monitoring, and troubleshooting as easy as possible.

Connection Requirements
In order to connect to the OrionLX, the following hardware and software are required.

Serial Connection Ethernet Connection

Hardware PC with available USB port and A/B PC with Ethernet port and Ethernet
USB cable (included with Orion) cable
Software - NCD or - NCD or
- any terminal software - any software which allows SSH
connection (CRT, PuTTY, etc.)

Table 114: Serial/Ethernet Cables and Software

259
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Connecting to the Orion MMI
There are two configuration and MMI ports provided on the OrionLX front panel (A1 and A2). The OrionLX+
provides a single configuration and MMI port (A) on the front panel.

OrionLX Port A1
Port A1 is automatically set up to run the MMI and does not require any configuration. The communication
parameters are 115200 Baud, No Parity, 8 Data Bits, and 1 Stop Bit (115200-N-8-1). The terminal mode
is ANSI. For port A1, the parameters cannot be changed, meaning the above parameters are fixed, and
the port cannot be used for a protocol.

Connecting to port A1 (and any other serial port set up as MMI port) requires a null-modem cable (NovaTech
part number NT-NM9MF). If custom cables are used, the Orion requires only three lines to be connected;
Transmit, Receive, and Ground. Port A1 has a standard RS-232 pinout on a DB9 female connector as
shown below:

Pin Usage
2 Receive
3 Transmit
5 Ground

Table 115: Port A1 Pinout

Loading a NCD configuration file into the OrionLX enables the OrionLX to operate the configured protocols
on all other ports, as well as operating additional MMI ports, user-defined logic, etc.

OrionLX Port A2 and OrionLX+ Port A

OrionLX Port A2 and OrionLX+ Port A are USB B connector automatically set up to run the MMI, and do
not require any configuration. The communication parameters are 115200 Baud, No Parity, 8 Data Bits,
and 1 Stop Bit (115200N81). The terminal mode is ANSI. These parameters cannot be changed, meaning
the above parameters are fixed, and the port cannot be used for a protocol.

Loading a NCD configuration file into the Orion enables the Orion to operate the configured protocols on
all other ports, as well as operating additional MMI ports, user-defined logic, etc.

Connecting to the OrionLX with NCD

The chapter Communications Menu describes how to set up a serial connection in NCD and how to connect
to an OrionLX. After connecting to the OrionLX MMI, login to the OrionLX with the appropriate username
and password.

260
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Unlocking a User Account
If a user is locked out due to too many failed login attempts, the Orion MMI can be used to view the failed
login attempts and unlock the user account. This must be done from an administrative or root user account.
In the terminal window, type the command faillog followed by the username to reset the locked out user
account. Example: faillog novatech. See the Orion Linux Commands Tech Note for a list of other
shell commands that can be used in the terminal window.

MMI Menus
The OrionLX displays the following Main Menu on Port A1 or A2.

All menu items in Figure 200 are hyperlinks to the respective sections.

OrionLX
Automation Platform
Version 2.2.21 Date: 08/14/2020
Copyright 2000-2020 NovaTech LLC
OrionDemo.ncd

Main Menu
--------------------------------------------

1. File Menu
2. Data Menu
3. View Communications
4. Device Statistics
5. System Menu
6. Disconnect
7. Session Timeouts
8. Network Menu

Figure 200: OrionLX MMI Main Menu

261
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
File Menu
The File Menu allows uploading, downloading, activation, and deletion of configuration files from the
OrionLX. File transfers between the PC and the OrionLX use the Z-Modem file transfer protocol.

All menu items in Figure 201 are hyperlinks to the respective sections.

OrionLX
Automation Platform
Version 2.2.21 Date: 08/14/2020
Copyright 2000-2020 NovaTech LLC

File Menu
--------------------------------------------

1. File Transfer (PC -> ORION)

2. File Transfer (ORION -> PC)
3. Make Config File Active
4. Delete a File
5. View a File

Figure 201: OrionLX File Menu

262
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
File Transfer (PC -> ORION)

This option allows the selection of and uploading of files, such as .ncd or .bas, to the Orion. When using
NCD, the following window will open to select the file or files that are currently open in NCD on the PC.

Figure 202: File Transfer to OrionLX

File Type/Extension File Use Description

.ncd Configuration file Orion configuration file.
.bas Logic file Logic in “Basic” syntax executed by the Orion.
.lua Advanced logic file Logic in Lua programming language.
.ncz Compressed file IEC 61850, IEC 61131, and/or SNMP configuration.
orionlx.ntk Key file The key file specifies what protocol drivers a specific
OrionLXm is licensed to run. Protocols will not execute
without the proper license in this file. Contact NovaTech
support for troubleshooting.

Table 116: OrionLX File Types

263
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
File Transfer (ORION -> PC)

This feature uploads a specific file from the Orion to the PC. The typical reason for this would be to review
a configuration that has been downloaded from another PC that is not available on the presently connected
PC. First, specify the file to be downloaded by its number on the following screen.

Note: Files can be uploaded only one file at a time.

If more than 20 files are stored in flash memory, the screen ends with ---More---. In this case, hitting
any key will scroll the screen by 20 more lines, or until the end of the file list.

1. orion16.ini
2. central.bas
3. central.ncd
4. southyard.ncd
5. southyard.bas

Please enter the number of the file to send to PC:

Figure 203: File Transfer OrionLX to PC

After entering a file number, a browser window is displayed for specifying the location on the hard drive for
the file that is to be transferred to the PC.

264
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Make Config File Active

An Orion can have several .ncd files (and associated .bas, .lua, and/or .ncz files) stored in its flash memory.
However, only one of those files can be active at any given time. This option specifies the configuration file
the OrionLX shall load and operate. The user must verify that the configuration file loaded is actually
intended for the specific OrionLX, and that the OrionLX has the correct hardware options installed. In the
following screen, the configuration file to be loaded is specified by its number. If there is a logic file
associated with a configuration file, it will be loaded automatically.

If more than 20 files are stored in flash memory, the screen ends with ---More---. In this case, hitting
any key will scroll the screen by 20 more lines, or until the end of the file list.

1. spv1_31.ncd
2. bricktn2.ncd
3. central.ncd
4. southyard.ncd
5. eastyard.ncd

Please enter the number of the file to make active:

Figure 204: Configuration File Selection

After the new configuration file has been specified, the Orion must be restarted in order for the configuration
file to be loaded and run (Figure 205). If Do not restart is chosen, the OrionLX will continue to operate
with the current configuration file.

A Full restart resets all hardware, all software, and all drivers; including the operating system.
However, it can take up to several minutes, depending on the OrionLX’s configuration.

A Quick restart reloads only the protocol drivers and usually takes under 60 seconds to complete.

In order for the new configuration to take effect the

OrionLX must be restarted. Do you wish to perform a
full restart, quick restart or no restart?

1. Full restart.
2. Quick restart.
3. Do not restart.

Figure 205: Make Selected Configuration File Active

265
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Delete a File

If multiple configuration files are downloaded to the OrionLX for testing, commissioning, or for use as a lab
unit, eventually files will have to be deleted off the flash memory of the OrionLX. Figure 206 shows a list of
files from which the file to be deleted must be specified by its number. Files can be deleted only one at a
time by entering the number that is listed with the respective file.

If more than 20 files are stored in the flash memory, the screen ends with ---More---. In this case, hitting
any key will scroll the screen by 20 more lines, or until the end of the file list.

After a file has been specified, a user prompt requires confirmation of the operation.

1. spv1_31.ncd
2. spv1_31.bas
3. orion16.ini
4. southyard.ncd
5. southyard.bas

Please enter the number of the file to delete:

Figure 206: Delete File from Flash Memory

View a File

View a file allows viewing of a configuration file. First, the file must be selected using its number as
shown in the following screen. If more than 20 files are stored in flash memory, the screen ends
with ---More---. In this case, hitting any key will scroll the screen by 20 more lines, or until the end of
the file list.

After entering the file number, the actual file is displayed. The  (Cursor Up) and  (Cursor Down) keys
allow scrolling through the file. <Esc> returns to the menu. Entering <G> prompts for a line number to go
to, and then displays that line (Figure 208).

1. spv1_31.ncd
2. spv1_31.bas
3. southyard.ncd
4. southyard.bas

Please enter the number of the file to view:

Figure 207: Select File for Viewing

266
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

ConfigCreation=7/20/2012 11:58:47
ConfigLastWrite=8/06/2012 9:41:05
RemoteUsername=
RemotePassword=
RemoteAttemptsBeforeLockout=0
RemoteLockoutTime=0
MMITCPPort=23
ForceInputs=1
ForceOutputs=1

[Comments]

[System]
BootDelay=0
EnableRouting=0
LoadTimeout=

[Orion Model]
Model=OrionLX
NetworkCards=NONE
ModbusPlusCards=NONE
InternalModem=0

Figure 208: View File

267
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Data Menu
Option 2 of the main menu is Data Menu. The Data Menu allows real-time viewing of each input/output
point’s value information on a port-by-port basis.

An input point is a point that is obtained from a field device and reported to a client, and an output point is
a point that is sent from a client to a field device. Since the Orion essentially only passes through points
from the front end to the end device, the notion of input point and output point is maintained the same way,
whether the point is viewed as part of a client port where the Orion acts as a client to an end device, or as
part of a server port where the Orion acts as a server to a front end/SCADA master.

The following options are available only if the Force Inputs and Force Outputs options are selected
accordingly under option General in NCD.

3. Override Input Values

4. Clear Input Override
5. Send Output Values

Forcing an input/output point means that the Orion will use the value(s) as entered by the user at the MMI
of the OrionLX. These values are then transmitted when communicating to SCADA masters (to which the
OrionLX is a server) or RTUs/IEDs (to which the OrionLX is a client). Forced values temporarily replace
values from live devices the OrionLX communicates with. This is useful for testing, or when the OrionLX is
installed and not all other devices or communication links are available yet.

All menu items in Figure 209 are hyperlinks to the respective sections.

OrionLX
Automation Platform
Version 2.2.21 Date: 08/14/2020
Copyright 2000-2020 NovaTech LLC

Data Menu
--------------------------------------------

1. View Input Values

2. View Output Values
3. Force Input Values
4. Clear Forced Input Values
5. Force Output Values

Figure 209: Data Menu

268
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
View Input Values

After selecting this option, select the port whose point values are to be monitored from the following screen.

OrionLX
Version 2.2.21 Date: 08/14/2020
Copyright 2000-2020 NovaTech LLC

Input Values
--------------------------------------------

1. Port 1 - SEL Client

2. Port B - DDIO Port
3. Port 20 - NTP Kernel
4. Port 21 - Sensor Client
5. Port 24 - XML
6. Port 25 - SER Client
7. Port 26 - AAR Server
8. Port 124 - Logic

Figure 210: Select Port for Input Point Monitoring

Each data point in the OrionLX will typically be displayed on at least two ports; the client port that obtains
the point from another device, and the server port through which another device polls the OrionLX for the
point’s value. A point can also be mapped to more than one server port if more than one client polls the
OrionLX for that point. The OrionLX maintains the point’s value in the real-time database as a normalized
value, i.e. percentage of full scale. However, the scaled values for the same point will vary, based on the
scaling entered for each port. See also NovaTech’s Analog/Accumulator Scaling Technical Note for more
details.

Once a port is selected, all its values are displayed as follows.

Data values for Port 1 - SEL Client (p1)

Name Point Number Value Percent FS
Polls @SEL 501 Dual Relay N/A 390244.000 0.009086
Responses @SEL 501 Dual Relay N/A 390244.000 0.009086
Comm Fail @SEL 501 Dual Relay N/A 0.000 0.000000
Meter IAX @SEL 501 Dual Relay 00040 3.000 0.009156
Meter IBX @SEL 501 Dual Relay 00041 0.000 0.000000
Meter ICX @SEL 501 Dual Relay 00042 9.000 0.027467
PassThru Status @SEL 501 Dual 00998 0.000 0.000000

ESC=Back C=Column Editor S=Sort Editor H=Hex D=Dec O=Oct

Figure 211: Input Point Monitoring

269
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
The  (Cursor Up) and  (Cursor Down) keys allow paging through the points on the selected port. In the
header of the above figure, (p1) indicates page 1 of the points list.

<G> allows jumping to a specific page. After pressing <G>, Goto: appears in the lower left hand corner for
entering the specific page number, followed by <Enter>.

<Esc> returns to the screen in Figure 209.

<H>, <D>, and <O> display the Value column in hexadecimal, decimal, or octal format, respectively. The
default display is decimal.

<C> starts the Column Editor (Figure 212). The Orion always displays four columns, and defaults to the
columns shown initially. In the column editor, columns can be removed from and added to the display.
New columns are displayed in the order in which they were added. After specifying the desired columns,
<Esc> returns to the previous screen.

COLUMN EDITOR

Add/Remove: Selected Columns:

1. Remove Name Name
2. Add Device Point Number
3. Add Data Type Value
4. Remove Point Number Percent FS
5. Add Changes
6. Add Fails
7. Add Successes
8. Remove Value
9. Remove Percent FS
0. Add Comm Status
A. Add Forced
B. Add Alias

Figure 212: Data View Column Editor

Field Description
Name Point’s tagname, such as Breaker424 @HVRelay.
Device Device from which the point originates, such as HVRelay.
Data Type AI: Analog Input, BI: Binary Input, ACC or CI: Accumulator/Counter Input.
Point Protocol-specific point number. Depending on the protocol and the way it addresses
Number points, points may be numbered in hexadecimal (17h), decimal (23), or octal (27o). The
MMI will display the point address the way the specific protocol addresses points. If there
is a bit position within a word, the point number is displayed as 17:03, which means bit 3
in word 17. Bit numbering and word sizes are protocol dependent, i.e. bit 1 can be LSB
or MSB, and a word can be 8 bits or 16 bits. The respective protocol manual provides
detailed information.
Changes Counter that displays the number of point changes since the Orion (re)start. For analog
or accumulator points, every data change increments the corresponding change counter
by 1. For digital points, every 0-1 or 1-0 transition increments the change counter by 1.

270
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Field Description
Fails Failed polls for the specific point.
Successes Successful polls for the specific point.
Value Current value of the point as per communication with an end device. If the point has been
forced, the forced value will be displayed instead of the value from the end device.
Percent Percent of full scale of the current value. For example, if the value is scaled from -2048
FS to 2047, and the current value is 1024, this file will show 0.75 for 75%.
Comm If the corresponding value is updated from the remote device, the field will show Online.
Status If there is any type of communication error with the remote device, the field will show
Offline.
Forced No or Yes, depending on whether the value is obtained from the server device, or
overridden by a value entered at the Orion MMI.

Table 117: Data Point Information

The Sort Editor (Figure 213) is started by pressing the <S> key. The editor allows sorting of the data
screen by any of the displayed columns. Table 117 shows the available sort criteria. Up to three sort
criteria can be selected, each in ascending (lowest value first) or descending order (highest value first).
First, one or more of the existing sort criteria must be removed. Then the new sort criteria must be selected.
Ascending order will be indicated by ASC, and descending order will be indicated by DESC. Once the sort
order is specified, <Esc> returns to the previous screen.

SORT EDITOR

Add/Remove: Sort Order:

1. Add Name Device ASC
2. Remove Device Data Type ASC
3. Remove Data Type Point Number ASC
4. Remove Point Number
5. Add Changes
6. Add Fails
7. Add Successes
8. Add Value
9. Add Percent FS
0. Add Comm Status
A. Add Forced
B. Add Alias

Figure 213: Data View Sort Editor

271
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
View Output Values

On the following screen (Figure 214), the port whose point values are to be monitored is selected. The last
output value sent to the device is displayed. Depending on the application, the output value may have been
sent by a client that the OrionLX is connected to as a server, or it may have been generated by logic running
in the OrionLX, or it may have been forced at the MMI.

OrionLX
Version 2.2.21 Date: 08/14/2020
Copyright 2000-2020 NovaTech LLC

Output Values
--------------------------------------------

1. Port 1 - SEL Client

2. Port B - DDIO Port
3. Port 20 - NTP Kernel
4. Port 21 - Sensor Client
5. Port 24 - XML
6. Port 25 - SER Client
7. Port 26 - AAR Server
8. Port 124 - Logic

Figure 214: Select Port for Output Monitoring

Once a port is selected, all of its values are displayed as follows.

Output values for Port 25 - SER Client (p1)

Name Point Number Last Output Percent FS
Output1 @OrionIO 1 0 0.000000
Output2 @OrionIO 2 1 100.00000
Output3 @OrionIO 3 0 0.000000
Output4 @OrionIO 4 1 100.00000

ESC=Back C=Column Editor S=Sort Editor H=Hex D=Dec O=Oct

Figure 215: Output Point Monitoring

The  (Cursor Up) and  (Cursor Down) keys allow paging through all the points on the selected port. In
the header of the above figure, (p1)indicates page 1 of the points list.

<Esc>, <C>, <S>, <H>, <D>, <O>, and <G> are identical options for viewing input values, and are explained
in the section View Input Values.

272
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Force Input Values

Forcing input values allows testing of the correct transmission of values to the client that is polling the
OrionLX, without having to generate those values in the end device in the field. This can be necessary
under several circumstances:

▪ The end device and/or the communication to it, have not yet been installed, or are temporarily not
available.
▪ Generation of test values in the end device is too complicated or not possible, depending on the end
device.

By default, this function is enabled when the configuration file is set up in NCD.

As with the other options, first select the port of the point that is to be forced temporarily.

OrionLX
Version 2.2.21 Date: 08/14/2020
Copyright 2000-2020 NovaTech LLC

Force Input Values

--------------------------------------------

1. Port 1 - SEL Client

2. Port B - DDIO Port
3. Port 20 - NTP Kernel
4. Port 21 - Sensor Client
5. Port 24 - XML
6. Port 25 - SER Client
7. Port 26 - AAR Server
8. Port 124 - Logic

Figure 216: Select Port for Forcing Input Values

The  (Cursor Up) and  (Cursor Down) keys allow scrolling to the point which is to be forced. All points
on the port are available and are sorted in alphabetical order of the tagname. The current point is always
highlighted. Pressing <Enter> selects the point to be forced. <G> (Goto) allows jumping to a specific
page by entering the page number.

Force values for Port 1 - SEL Client (p1)

Comm Fail @SEL 501 Dual Relay
Meter IAX @SEL 501 Dual Relay
Meter IBX @SEL 501 Dual Relay
Meter ICX @SEL 501 Dual Relay
PassThru Status @SEL 501 Dual Relay
Polls @SEL 501 Dual Relay
Responses @SEL 501 Dual Relay

Figure 217: Select Input Point

273
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

FORCE INPUT VALUE

Point Name: Meter IAX @SEL 501 Dual Relay

Percent Full Scale: 0.018311
Comm Status: Online
Minimum Value: 0.000000
Maximum Value: 32767.000000
Scaled Value: 6.000000
Manually Forced: No

Force Value
Back

Figure 218: Force Input Point

Pressing <Enter> while on Force Value in the above screen displays the following screen (Figure 219).
By entering the following parameters, an input point can be forced to a specific value. This facilitates the
testing of the Orion’s communication link with any SCADA master polling those input values without having
to go through the effort of forcing the test values in the end devices in the field.

With this command, the Orion data point will indicate an equipment
state or condition to the SCADA master that is only simulated and does
not reflect the actual state or condition. This may lead the SCADA
master or personnel to initiate operations based on the simulated state
as opposed to the actual state. The necessary permissions must be
obtained from the control center and other departments in accordance
with your corporate safety and operating guidelines. Failure to do so
could result in equipment damage, injury, and/or death.

FORCE INPUT VALUE

Point Name: Comm Fail @SEL 501 Dual Relay

Percent Full Scale: 0.000000
Comm Status: Online
Minimum Value: 0.000000
Maximum Value: 1.000000
Scaled Value: 0.000000
Manually Forced: No

Forced Point Values

Scaled Value [ 0.000000]

Percent Full Scale [ 0.000000]
Comm Status [ Online]
Time to Remain Forced [ 5]
Force Value
Cancel

Figure 219: Enter Input Point Value

274
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Function Description
Scaled Value One of these two values is required for all point types. For digital input points,
enter 0-1 or 0-100 percent, and for analog values enter either the scaled value,
Percent Full or its percentage of full scale. Regardless of the point type, a value must be
entered in either of those two fields, as this is the value that will be sent to any
Scale polling SCADA master.
Comm Status A point can be simulated as being either Online or Offline. Online indicates
that the value is received online from the end device. Offline means that there
is no communication with the end device. However, the most recent value as of
the time of the last communication can still be polled.
Time to Remain Determines how long the point will stay in the simulated state before returning to
Forced the actual value as obtained from the end device. The unit is minutes.
Force Value After entering the above parameters, Force Value or Cancel must be selected.
or Cancel immediately returns to the points list (Figure 217). Force Value
Cancel displays a prompt to confirm the operation before sending the entered output point
value to the field device.

Table 118: Force Input Point Parameters

FORCE INPUT VALUE

Point Name: Meter IAX @SEL 501 Dual Relay

Percent Full Scale: 0.024415
Comm Status: Online
Minimum Value: 0.000000
Maximum Value: 32767.000000
Scaled Value: 8.000000
Manually Forced: Yes

Remove Forced Value

Back

Figure 220: Remove Forced Input Value

275
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Clear Forced Input Values

With this option, forced inputs can be cleared. This means that all forced input values are removed, and
that the real-time values from the field devices are used and transmitted to the client station again.

Are you sure that you want clear the override flag
for all input values? This will cause all forced
inputs to change value on the next scan.

(Y/N)

Figure 221: Clear Input Override

With this command, multiple value and state changes may be reported
to the SCADA master. All involved personnel must be informed of this
action in order to avoid wrong responses to the real-time data reported
to the SCADA master. Failure to do so could result in equipment
damage, injury, and/or death.

Force Output Values

This function forces output values to connected server/end devices as entered by the Orion. During normal
operation, any output commands sent to those devices would be issued by a front end/SCADA master, and
merely passed through by the Orion. This function can be used for localized testing without involving the
entire system end-to-end.

By default, this function is enabled when the configuration file is set up in NCD.

With this command, you will possibly operate a live piece of equipment
on the end device, the same way it would be operated locally, or from
the front end/SCADA master. The necessary permissions must be
obtained from the control center and other departments in accordance
with your corporate safety and operating guidelines. Failure to do so
could result in equipment damage, injury, and/or death.

276
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
For the output point to be forced, first select the point’s port (Figure 222).

OrionLX
Version 2.2.21 Date: 08/14/2020
Copyright 2000-2020 NovaTech LLC

Output Values
--------------------------------------------

1. Port 1 - SEL Client

2. Port B - DDIO Port
3. Port 20 - NTP Kernel
4. Port 21 - Sensor Client
5. Port 24 - XML
6. Port 25 - SER Client
7. Port 26 - AAR Server
8. Port 124 - Logic

Figure 222: Select Port for Forcing Output Values

The  (Cursor Up) and  (Cursor Down) keys allow scrolling to the data point to be forced (Figure 223). All
points on the port are available, and are sorted in alphabetical order of the tagname. The current point is
always highlighted. Pressing <Enter> selects the point to be forced. <G> (Goto) allows jumping to a
specific page after entering the page number.

Force outputs for Port 25 - SER Client (p1)

Output1 @OrionIO
Output2 @OrionIO
Output3 @OrionIO
Output4 @OrionIO

Figure 223: Select Point for Forcing Output Value

On the following screen, the two initial choices are Force Value and Back. Back will return to the point
selection screen (Figure 223). Force Value displays the screen in Figure 224. This screen is a “generic”
screen in that it shows all parameters possibly needed, whether the output point is a simple discrete output,
a select-before-operate output, a trip/close output, a pulse output, or an analog output/setpoint. Depending
on the protocols used to connect the front end/SCADA master to the end device, only a selection of the
listed types will be available, as either the protocol between the front end and the Orion and/or the protocol
between the Orion and the end device may not support all point types.

277
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

Point Name: Output2 @OrionIO

Percent Full Scale: 0.000000
Comm Status: Offline
Minimum Value: 0.000000
Maximum Value: 1.000000
Scaled Value: 0.000000

Force Value
Back

Figure 224: Forcing Output Value

FORCE OUTPUT

Point Name: Output2 @OrionIO

Percent Full Scale: 0.000000
Comm Status: Offline
Minimum Value: 0.000000
Maximum Value: 1.000000
Scaled Value: 0.000000

Forced Output Values

Scaled Value [ 0.000000]

Percent Full Scale [ 0.000000]
Duration (msec) [ 0]
Pulses [ 0]
Offtime (msec) [ 0]
Force Value
Cancel

Figure 225: Entering Forced Output Value

278
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Function Description
Scaled Value One of these two values is required for all point types. For digital output points,
enter 0-1 or 0-100 percent, and for analog values enter either the scaled value,
Percent Full or its percentage of full scale. Regardless of the point type, a value must be
entered in either of those two fields, as this is the value that will be sent to the
Scale output point.
Depending on the output point type, the following fields may be required.
Duration (ms) Usually, trip/close, raise/lower, and pulse outputs require a duration. If none is
entered, and a default value is used in the point configuration, the default value is
used instead.
Pulses For pulse output points, the number of pulses is required.
Offtime (ms) For pulse output points, the offtime between on-pulses is required as well.
Force Value After entering Scaled Value/Percent Full Scale, Duration, Pulses, and
Offtime, Force Value or Cancel must be selected. Cancel immediately
Cancel returns to the points list (Figure 223). Force Value displays a prompt to confirm
the selection on a separate screen before sending the entered output point value
to the field device.

Table 119: Force Output Point Parameters

279
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
View Communications
The ability to view the real-time communications of all OrionLX ports facilitates identifying and resolving
communication and configuration questions.

To view communications, the port to be monitored must first be selected from the screen shown in Figure
226 by entering its number. Live communication sent and received on this port of the OrionLX will then be
displayed (Figure 227). If the OrionLX is a client, then an exchange typically starts with a transmission of
a poll/command (indicated by TX), and ends with a reception of the reply (RX). If the OrionLX is a server,
an exchange typically consists of a reception (RX) of a poll/command, to which the OrionLX replies with the
transmission of a reply (TX). The OrionLX displays limited verbose explanation of the data exchanged. For
a detailed explanation, refer to the standard manual of the protocol that is being monitored. Typically, the
protocol manuals are not supplied by NovaTech, but by the supplier of the equipment that the OrionLX
connects to.

OrionLX
Automation Platform
Version 2.2.21 Date: 08/14/2020
Copyright 2000-2020 NovaTech LLC

Communications Menu
--------------------------------------------

1. Port 1 - SEL Client

2. Port B - DDIO Port
3. Port 20 - NTP Kernel
4. Port 21 - Sensor Client
5. Port 25 - SER Client
6. Port 26 - AAR Server

Figure 226: Communications Menu

280
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

Viewing Communications for Port B - DDIO Port

Press 'c' to change comm display options.
SYSTEM INFORMATION DUMP:
Uptime: 20 days, 19 hrs, 10 min
(Port B)(16:54:28:043):
(Port B)(16:54:28:043): Event/Individual Point Poll - DDIO Address 1
(Port B)(16:54:28:203)TX[33]: 05 64 18 C4 01 00 05 00 (99 F2)-CRC
C1 C1 01 3C 04 06 3C 03 06 3C 02 06 01 02 01 00 (55 82)-CRC
00 07 00 (9E 78)-CRC
(Port B)(16:54:28:281)RX[34]: 05 64 19 44 05 00 01 00 (EB CD)-CRC
C1 C1 81 10 00 01 02 01 00 00 07 00 01 01 01 01 (2C 0A)-CRC
01 01 01 01 (BF B9)-CRC
(Port B)(16:54:28:282): DDIO
(Port B)(16:54:28:282): IIN: Time Sync Request
(Port B)(16:54:28:284): Parse Binary Inputs - Range 0 to 7
(Port B)(16:54:29:087):
(Port B)(16:54:29:087): Event/Individual Point Poll - DDIO Address 1
(Port B)(16:54:29:246)TX[33]: 05 64 18 C4 01 00 05 00 (99 F2)-CRC
C2 C2 01 3C 04 06 3C 03 06 3C 02 06 01 02 01 00 (E9 E6)-CRC
00 07 00 (9E 78)-CRC
(Port B)(16:54:29:326)RX[34]: 05 64 19 44 05 00 01 00 (EB CD)-CRC
C2 C2 81 10 00 01 02 01 00 00 07 00 01 01 01 01 (90 6E)-CRC
01 01 01 01 (BF B9)-CRC

Figure 227: Viewing Communications

Additional communication information can be displayed by pressing <c> (lowercase) to change the
Communication Display Options (Figure 228). Any of the listed display options can be turned on or
off. For most communications issues, turning on the timestamps and the sequence numbers will be most
useful.

In order to effectively analyze protocol communication, familiarity with the monitored protocol and the
corresponding protocol documentation is required. The communication can also be logged to a file, and
sent to NovaTech for analysis. This allows in-depth tracking of issues.

281
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

COMM DISPLAY OPTIONS

0. Transmit Messages YES

1. Receive Messages YES
2. Transmit Errors YES
3. Receive Errors YES
4. Non Data Messages YES
5. Non Data Errors YES
6. Verbose Messages YES
7. Include Timestamp YES
8. Include Sequence Num.NO
9. Include Port Num. YES
A. Include Device Num. NO
B. Include Data Length. YES
C. Sys Info On 15min. NO

Figure 228: Communications Display Options

The following tables (Table 120 and Table 121) provide an overview of the most common communication
issues that can be tracked with the View Communications feature of the Orion. Depending on the
Orion’s configuration and communication system architecture, there may be numerous additional scenarios
that can only be examined on a case-by-case basis.

282
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Client Port Troubleshooting

The Orion communicates as a client to one or more end devices via a serial or Ethernet connection.

Observation Issue
There are no polls for an expected ▪ The device has not been configured at all.
device. ▪ The device has been configured, but with another device node
address. (If multidrop, another end device may respond in its
place.)
▪ The poll time (in Polls Groups) has been set to an excessive time,
so the polls could be much farther apart than anticipated.
There are no responses to polls ▪ The baud rate/parity bits/data bits/stop bits are not set up correctly
sent out by the Orion. in the device or the Orion.
▪ The cable/connection between the Orion and the device is not
plugged in.
▪ The connection between the Orion and the device is not set up
correctly (for example, a straight serial cable is used instead of a
null-modem cable, etc.).
There are error responses to polls ▪ The poll/command going to the end device is asking for points that
sent out by the Orion. are not configured in the end device. Check the point types and
addresses in the end device and verify against the points
configured in the Orion. This could be either an address specified
in the command, or the length/number of points specified.
▪ If an error is returned for an output command, the value specified
in the command could be out of range.

Table 120: Client Port Troubleshooting

283
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Server Port Troubleshooting

The OrionLX communicates as a server to a front end/SCADA master. The OrionLX can be part of a multi-
dropped network, and/or host multiple devices with different addresses. This way, the OrionLX responds
to the client for each device that it hosts, and the client cannot tell that it is communicating with a single
OrionLX in place of multiple RTUs.

Observation Issue
There are no polls for the device ▪ The front end/SCADA master is not set up (yet) to poll for the new
hosted by the Orion. device.
▪ The baud rate/parity bits/data bits/stop bits are not set up correctly
in the device or in the Orion.
▪ The cable/connection between the Orion and the device is not
plugged in.
▪ The connection between the Orion and the device is not set up
correctly (for example, a straight serial cable is used instead of
null-modem cable, etc.).
There are no responses from the ▪ There is a device address mismatch between the client and the
Orion. device(s) in the Orion, so the Orion does not see any of “its”
devices addressed.
There are multiple responses/ ▪ There is another device on the shared line with the same address
noise when the response is as a device in the Orion. Thus, both devices respond to the same
returned, and the client reports command, which results in overlaid simultaneous responses to
communication/CRC/BCH errors. the client, which in turn logs a communication error.

Table 121: Server Port Troubleshooting

284
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Device Statistics
The following screen shows the statistics for each server device connected to the OrionLX. Server devices
are devices being polled by the Orion.

<C> resets the poll/response counters for all devices to 0. The counters roll over at 232 (= 4,294,967,296).

The  (Cursor Up) and  (Cursor Down) keys allow scrolling through all the points on the selected port.

These options allow verifying connectivity and communication quality with server devices.

Device Statistics (C to Clear)

Port Device Status Polls Responses Percent Successful
1 SEL 501 Relay Online 392442 392442 100.000000
B DDIO Online 1168083 1168083 100.000000

Figure 229: Device Statistics

System Menu
The System Menu provides the Clock Configuration, Event Log, System, and Version
Information, etc. for the OrionLX as shown in the following menu.

All menu items in Figure 230 are hyperlinks to the respective sections.

OrionLX
Automation Platform
Version 2.2.21 Date: 08/14/2020
Copyright 2000-2020 NovaTech LLC

System Menu
--------------------------------------------

1. Clock Configuration
2. View System Info
3. View Event Log
4. Clear Event Log
5. View Version Info
6. Passthrough Menu
7. Thread Info
8. Restart

Figure 230: System Menu

285
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Clock Configuration

The hardware clock of the OrionLX can be set with the following menu. In order to change time or date,
select the respective item by entering the associated menu number as shown below.

For the new time to take effect, option 7. Save Time must be selected after the correct time and date
have been entered with options 1. through 6.

OrionLX
Automation Platform
Version 2.2.21 Date: 08/14/2020
Copyright 2000-2020 NovaTech LLC

Clock Configuration
--------------------------------------------

Current Date/Time: 08/07/2018 16:28:10

New Date/Time: 08/07/2018 16:27:21

1. Set Seconds
2. Set Minutes
3. Set Hours
4. Set Day
5. Set Month
6. Set Year
7. Save Time

Figure 231: Clock Configuration

286
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
View System Info

The System Information screen displays the following information.

OrionLX
Automation Platform
Version 2.2.21 Date: 08/14/2020
Copyright 2000-2020 NovaTech LLC

System Information
--------------------------------------------

Process Uptime: 14 days, 02 hrs, 56 min

System Uptime: 14 days, 23 hrs, 27 min
Keynum: 9000

Figure 232: System Information

Function Description
Process Uptime Shows the time since the last configuration change or software reboot of the
OrionLX.
System Uptime Shows the time since the last power-cycle or hardware reboot of the OrionLX.
Keynum Serial number of the Orion. The same number is also displayed on the label on
the Orion enclosure.

Table 122: System Information

287
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
View Event Log

An OrionLX event log is displayed below. It includes all Orion process events since the last warm boot or
configuration change. If needed, the log can be captured to a file as well (see chapter Communications
Menu). When testing a new configuration, it is recommended to always check the event log for messages
regarding the system status.

OrionLX
Automation Platform
Version 2.2.21 Date: 08/14/2020
Copyright 2000-2020 NovaTech LLC

View Event Log

--------------------------------------------

09/30/2009 18:31:56.500 notice: Orion Started!

09/30/2009 18:31:57.289 prtcl err: No function body found for
LogicOut1Change.
09/30/2009 18:31:57.289 prtcl err: No function body found for
OrionOut4Change.
09/30/2009 18:31:58.329 notice: LoadLibrary(mmi)
09/30/2009 18:31:59.858 notice: LoadLibrary(/usr/lib/orion/salar001.so)
09/30/2009 18:32:00.192 notice: LoadLibrary(/usr/lib/orion/msel129.so)
09/30/2009 18:32:00.409 notice: LoadLibrary(/usr/lib/orion/mdnp126.so)
09/30/2009 18:32:00.625 notice: LoadLibrary(/usr/lib/orion/mnki100.so)
09/30/2009 18:32:00.738 notice: LoadLibrary(/usr/lib/orion/msens101.so)
09/30/2009 18:32:00.853 notice: LoadLibrary(/usr/lib/orion/sled100.so)
09/30/2009 18:32:00.968 notice: LoadLibrary(/usr/lib/orion/shttp106.so)
09/30/2009 18:32:05.285 notice: Logic started.
10/13/2009 21:00:02.340 prtcl err: Archive Monitor: Connect failed.
Error: could not connect to server: No such file or directory
Is the server running locally and accepting connections on Unix domain
socket "/var/run/postgresql/.s.PGSQL.5432"?
10/13/2009 21:00:04.344 prtcl err: Archive Monitor: Connect failed.
Error: could not connect to server: No such file or directory
Is the server running locally and accepting connections on Unix domain
socket "/var/run/postgresql/.s.PGSQL.5432"?
10/13/2009 21:00:06.352 prtcl err: Archive Monitor: Connect failed.
Error: could not connect to server: No such file or directory
Is the server running locally and accepting connections on Unix domain
socket "/var/run/postgresql/.s.PGSQL.5432"?

Figure 233: View Event Log

Clear Event Log

The event log described in the previous chapter can be cleared by selecting this option. Note that when
selecting this option, the event log is cleared without requiring further confirmation.

288
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
View Version Info

This option lists the version and date of the protocol drivers and software as configured for each port. If
needed, the version information can be captured to a file (see Communications Menu).

OrionLX
Automation Platform
Version 2.2.21 Date: 08/14/2020
Copyright 2000-2020 NovaTech LLC

Version Information
--------------------------------------------

Orion Core Module - main.exe Version 2.2.21 08/14/2020 13:41:01

Port 1. SEL Client - msel129.so Version 1.29.5 09/17/2009 14:47:34

Port 2. none
Port 3. none
Port 4. none
Port 5. none
Port 6. none
Port 7. none
Port 8. none
Port 9. none
Port 10. none
Port 11. none
Port 12. none
Port 13. none
Port 14. none
Port 15. none
Port 16. none
Port A. Man Machine Interface - Version 2.2.4 06/24/2020 09:09:01
Port B. DNP Client - mdnp126.so Version 1.26.19 08/4/2009 15:41:01
Port C. none
Port D. none
Port 20. ntp interface - mnki100.so Version 1.0.3 09/15/2009 15:03:01
Port 21. Sensors - msens101.so Version 1.1.1 12/17/2008 10:06:01
Port 22. Sensors - sled100.so Version 1.0.0 09/15/2008 16:07:01
Port 23. http server - shttp106.so Version 1.6.0 08/15/2008 08:18:19
Port 24. xml server - sxml102.so Version 1.2.3 05/26/2009 11:47:00
Port 25. SER - mser100.so Version 1.0.7 07/13/2009 09:09:01
Port 26. AlarmArchiver - salar001.so Version 0.1.5 08/27/2009 10:04:00

Figure 234: Version Information

289
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Passthrough Menu

Many manufacturers of IEDs (Intelligent Electronic Devices) such as relays and meters provide special
software for device configuration, event and log extraction, etc. If the end device has two ports, the second
port can be directly connected to the PC running that software, bypassing the control network with the
OrionLX. However, the second port may not be available, or it may be impractical to use it. With the
Passthrough option, the IED manufacturer software installed on the PC can connect through the OrionLX
to the IED. This requires the following steps.

Passthrough to an IED

1. In the main menu, select 5) System Menu.

2. In this submenu, select 6) Pass-Through Menu.
3. In the Pass Through Menu (Figure 235), select a port number for passthrough.
4. At this point, NCD (or the terminal software) is directly connected to the IED, and a screen similar
to Figure 236 will be displayed.
4a. At this point, manual commands can be entered. These commands are sent directly to the IED
and executed, and the IED response is displayed in this screen.
4b. Alternatively, the IED manufacturer software can be started and connected to the IED after exiting
NCD. The IED software must use the same communication parameters that NCD used (since
the software will first connect with the Orion, and the Orion in turn will connect with the IED).
Once the IED operations are completed, the manufacturer’s software must be closed and NCD
restarted. In the NCD communication window, entering <Ctrl>-<X> five times terminates the
passthrough of the Orion.

OrionLX
Communication Processor
Version 2.2.21 Date: 08/14/2020
Copyright 2000-2020 NovaTech LLC

Pass Through Menu

--------------------------------------------

1. Pass Through to Port 1 - SEL Client 1

2. Pass Through to Port 2 - SEL Client 2
3. Pass Through to Port 10 - SEL Client 10

Figure 235: Passthrough Menu

290
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

Entering Pass Through Mode

Press CTRL-X five times to exit
2

3I2X IRX 3I2Y IRY

I (A,pri) 4 3 8 7

=>>QUI

HP-233 Date: 10/26/09 Time: 22:17:09.603

HP-232

Figure 236: Passthrough Window to Relay

291
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Thread Info

This option lists the running threads in the Orion, with port number and system/user time. If needed, the
thread information can be captured to a file (see Communications Menu).

ORION Thread Dump

0x40377490: Logging System Monitor Thread (port=0 level=1) Priority=0
tid: 4889
System Time: 0
User Time: 0

0x403E6490: MMI Port_17_Thread (port=17 level=0) Priority=0

tid: 4890
System Time: 0
User Time: 1

0x40625490: Alarm_Archive Main Thread 30 (port=30 level=0) Priority=0

tid: 4891
System Time: 0
User Time: 1

0x40718490: SEL Client Task_p1_Thread (port=1 level=0) Priority=0

tid: 4893
System Time: 1813
User Time: 788

0x40758490: SEL Client Start_p1_Thread (port=1 level=1) Priority=0

tid: 4894
System Time: 110796
User Time: 17260

0x407BC490: DNP Client Task_p18_Thread (port=18 level=0) Priority=0

tid: 4895
System Time: 98398
User Time: 41088

0x40808490: mnki_24_Thread (port=24 level=0) Priority=0

tid: 4896
System Time: 5701
User Time: 697

0x40856490: msens_25_Thread (port=25 level=0) Priority=0

tid: 4897
System Time: 13023
User Time: 1144

0x408A1490: sled_26_Thread (port=26 level=0) Priority=0

tid: 4898
System Time: 11
User Time: 3

0x408FC490: HTTP_main_27 (port=27 level=0) Priority=0

tid: 4899
System Time: 158
User Time: 101

0x40958490: sxml_p28_Thread (port=28 level=0) Priority=0

tid: 4900
System Time: 0
User Time: 0

292
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

0x409E6490: AAR Monitoring Thread 30 (port=30 level=1) Priority=0

tid: 4902
System Time: 26
User Time: 23

0x40A26490: Archive Monitoring Thread 30 (port=30 level=1) Priority=0

tid: 4903
System Time: 815
User Time: 874

0x40A66490: LogicThread (port=0 level=0) Priority=0

tid: 4904
System Time: 802
User Time: 46314

0x40AA6490: LOGICEventThread (port=128 level=1) Priority=0

tid: 4905
System Time: 0
User Time: 0

0x40AE6490: RPC Call tid 1085170832 (port=0 level=1) Priority=0

tid: 4906
System Time: 37
User Time: 10

0x40C3F490: DNP Client Monitor Thread_p18_Thread (port=18 level=1)

Priority=0
tid: 4907
System Time: 0
User Time: 0

0x40D40490: MMI UDS on /var/run/orion/mmi (port=0 level=1) Priority=0

tid: 9687
System Time: 15
User Time: 9

0x40DC1490: MMI TCP RX to (port=0 level=1) Priority=0

tid: 9688
System Time: 2
User Time: 0

0x40E01490: MMI TCP TX to (port=0 level=1) Priority=0

tid: 9689
System Time: 17
User Time: 13

Figure 237: Thread Info

293
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Restart

A Full restart resets all hardware and restarts all software and drivers, including the operating system.
However, it can take up to several minutes for the OrionLX to boot up, depending on the OrionLX’s
configuration.

A Quick restart reloads only the protocol drivers which usually takes under 60 seconds to complete.

Do you wish to perform a full restart, quick restart or no restart?

1. Full restart.
2. Quick restart.
3. Do not restart.

Figure 238: Restart Menu

Disconnect
From the Main Menu, this option closes the current session and disconnects NCD from the Orion.

The response is a brief display of Goodbye, and then the following statement is displayed:

Disconnected ** Press any key to reconnect

Session Timeouts
The session times out, i.e. disconnects, automatically after a specified time (default is 5 minutes). Timeout
is adjustable from 5 to 99 minutes. As shown below, the timeout is based on user/equipment behavior and
the timeout clock:

▪ Whether any user key strokes were sent to the Orion within the specified time
▪ Whether any user key strokes were sent to the Orion, or any information – such as screen updates,
communication updates, etc. – was sent from the Orion to the PC within the specified time

The second behavior option is useful when logging information from the OrionLX for lengthy periods of time.

294
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

OrionLX
Automation Platform
Version 2.2.21 Date: 08/14/2020
Copyright 2000-2020 NovaTech LLC

Session Timeouts
--------------------------------------------

Current session behavior:

End session if the Orion hasn't received in the specified time.

Press 1 to change behavior to:

End session if the Orion has neither sent or received in the specified
time.

Timeout: 5 minutes
Press 2 to specify a timeout in minutes.

Figure 239: Session Timeouts

With the following setting, communication can be logged to file indefinitely as long as drive space is
available, and communications are either sent or received.

OrionLX
Automation Platform
Version 2.2.4 Date: 01/22/2020
Copyright 2000-2018 NovaTech LLC

Session Timeouts
--------------------------------------------

Current session behavior:

End session if the Orion has neither sent or received in the specified
time.

Press 1 to change behavior to:

End session if the Orion hasn't received in the specified time.

Timeout: 99 minutes
Press 2 to specify a timeout in minutes.

Figure 240: Session Timeouts

295
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Network Menu
On the Network Menu, the Orion network parameters such as IP address, gateway, and firewall can be set
up. All menu items in Figure 241 are hyperlinks to the respective sections.

OrionLX
Automation Platform
Version 2.2.21 Date: 08/14/2020
Copyright 2000-2020 NovaTech LLC

Network Menu
--------------------------------------------

1. Basic Network Configuration

2. Start/Stop Firewall

Figure 241: Network Menu

Basic Network Configuration

This menu selection displays the current configuration of network ports, (Eth0 and Eth1), and provides for
editing of the port. The Orion Networking webpage allows for advanced network configuration.

If any changes have been made, option 4. Save Settings must be executed before pressing <Esc> to
return to the previous menu.

Basic Network Configuration

--------------------------------------------

Eth0 (eth0) IP Address: 172.16.16.20 Subnet: 255.255.0.0

Gateway: 172.16.0.1 Media: auto

Eth1 (eth1) IP Address: 64.126.95.173 Subnet: 255.255.240.0

Gateway: 64.126.80.1 Media: auto

1. Edit Eth0 (eth0)

2. Edit Eth1 (eth1)
4. Save Settings
5. Reset to defaults

Figure 242: Basic Network Configuration

296
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
The following parameters are set up individually for each Ethernet port. Since each port can be connected
to a different network, the parameters are entered separately for each port.

As per factory default, all ports are initially disabled. Select the menu option for the port that is to be
configured. Then select 1. Enable Interface which will open the menu to set the interface parameters
(Figure 243).

OrionLX
Automation Platform
Version 2.2.21 Date: 08/14/2020
Copyright 2000-2020 NovaTech LLC

Basic Network Configuration

--------------------------------------------

Eth0 (eth0) IP Address: 172.16.16.20

Subnet: 255.255.0.0
Gateway: 172.16.0.1
Media Settings: auto

1. Disable Interface
2. Enable DHCP
3. Edit IP Address
4. Edit Subnet
5. Edit Gateway
6. Edit Media Settings

Figure 243: Edit Port-Specific Parameters

Function Description
Disable/Enable Controls the operational state of the selected Network interface port.
Interface
Enable DHCP If DHCP is enabled, the IP Address, Subnet, and Gateway are assigned by a
DHCP server on the network. In most cases, DHCP will be disabled and these
parameters are entered manually as permanent values as described below.
Generally, these parameters are determined as part of the system architecture, or
by the IT department.
IP Address The IP address has the format n.n.n.n where n = 0..255, e.g. 172.16.16.20.
Subnet The Subnet mask has the format n.n.n.n where n = 0..255, e.g. 255.255.0.0.
Gateway The Gateway address is required for outbound traffic that is located on another
network. It has the format n.n.n.n where n = 0..255, e.g. 172.16.16.1.
Media Settings Defines the speed at which the OrionLX communicates over the network. auto
negotiate allows the OrionLX to connect at the optimal available speed.
Selecting a speed and duplex mode restricts this port to the selected speed and
half duplex mode.

Table 123: Port-Specific Parameters

297
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Note: Each port must belong to a different network and set up with corresponding IP
addresses. If network ports are set up with IP addresses belonging to the same IP
network, IP communication errors may occur.

Example 1: 192.168.x.x and 172.16.x.x are different networks.

Example 2: With subnet mask 255.255.255.128, the ranges 192.168.1.1 - 192.168.1.127 and
192.168.1.129 - 192.168.1.255 are different networks.

Verify the port parameters and press <Esc> to return to the previous menu (Figure 242) and select
4. Save settings.

Note that the MMI is intended primarily for setting up one Ethernet port to enable configuration via the Orion
webpage. If more than one Ethernet port are set up with a gateway, then the MMI changes as shown in
Figure 244. The Gateway IP addresses are no longer displayed. Instead, “Advanced” is displayed and
only option 5 is available for resetting the network settings to the factory defaults. Any other settings must
be made on the Orion webpage in Settings -> Networking.

Basic Network Configuration

--------------------------------------------

Eth0( eth0) IP Address: 172.16.123.100 Subnet: 255.255.0.0

Gateway: Advanced Media: auto negotiate

Eth1( eth1) IP Address: 172.16.16.20 Subnet: 255.255.0.0

Gateway: Advanced Media: auto negotiate

5. Reset to defaults

Figure 244: Network Port Configuration – Multiple Gateways Configured

298
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Start/Stop Firewall

The following menu provides the options for starting or stopping the Orion’s firewall. Additional firewall
options and settings are described in chapter Firewall.

OrionLX
Automation Platform
Version 2.2.21 Date: 08/14/2020
Copyright 2000-2020 NovaTech LLC

Start/Stop Firewall
--------------------------------------------

1. Start firewall
2. Stop firewall

Figure 245: Start/Stop Firewall

299
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

V. Orion Direct Video

Introduction
PCs installed in critical substations are now designated by NERC as “critical cyber assets”, resulting in
additional security and administrative procedures. Therefore, alternatives to substation PCs which are
subject to the new requirements are needed. The OrionLX and the Multimedia option can replace
substation HMI PC and eliminate PC-related security concerns. A complete security package is included
with the OrionLX Multimedia option, including user sign-on, firewalling, user activity logging and
authorization for executing controls, application of tags, and/or acknowledgment of alarms.

The Multimedia option requires the OrionLX with option CPX (high performance CPU) or the OrionLX+ as
follows:

Orion Model Option Connector

OrionLX CPX MMB VGA port
OrionLX+ MMC DisplayPort

Table 124: Orion Direct Video

The pages viewable on the video port are the same OrionLX webpages that can be viewed via Ethernet on
a separate PC. That includes the OrionLX online configuration and diagnostic pages, alarm pages, trending
pages, sequence of event pages, and custom user-designed pages. An open source SVG graphics editor
produces the Orion WEBserver HMI screens.

The following figure shows the setup of the OrionLX as a PC alternative.

Figure 246: OrionLX CPX with Video, Keyboard, and Mouse

300
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Multimedia Options
OrionLX with MMB (Multimedia Board)
The OrionLX supports the Multimedia Board (MMB) which has a VGA port, an audio port, two USB ports,
and an Ethernet port as shown in Figure 247. The MMB is located on the left hand side of the rear panel
of the OrionLX CPX, above the power supply connectors.

Figure 247: Additional Ports on Multimedia Board

In addition to the power and communication connections described above (see chapter Orion Hardware),
the OrionLX CPX with MMB also provides ports for a VGA monitor, keyboard, mouse, and audio output as
well as a third Ethernet port (ETH2).

Component OrionLX Port Port Label

Monitor 1280x1024 15-pin VGA VGA OUT
Keyboard, mouse USB KBD/MOUSE
Speakers 3.5mm audio AUDIO OUT
Ethernet RJ45 ETH2

Table 125: MMB Option - Port Labeling

Note: The Ethernet port (ETH2) parameters are set up as described in chapter Networking.

301
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
OrionLX+ with MMC (Multimedia Card)
The OrionLX+ supports the Multimedia Card (MMC) which has a digital DisplayPort interface (DP1) and an
audio output port as shown in Figure 248. The MMC is located on the right-hand side of the rear panel,
above the Ethernet and USB ports.

Figure 248: Multimedia Card Ports

In addition to the power and communication connections described above (see chapter Orion Hardware),
the OrionLX+ with MMC also provides ports for a digital video monitor and audio output. If the connected
monitor is a touch screen monitor, also connect the touch screen monitor to the OrionLX+ with a USB A/A
cable (not included) in addition to the display port cable.

A keyboard and mouse, if they are to be used, can be connected to any of the four USB ports shown
above.

Component OrionLX+ Port Port Label

Monitor 20-pin DataPort DP 1
Speakers 3.5mm audio plug AUDIO

Table 126: MMC Option – Port Labeling

Note: The OrionLX+ does not support adaptors that convert the digital Display Port video to
analog VGA video.

302
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Multimedia Connection/Setup
The physical connections of the video port are like that of setting up a standard PC as follows:

1. Make sure the Orion is powered down.

2. Connect the monitor, keyboard, mouse, and the speakers to the respective ports (Figure 247 or Figure
248).

3. Power up the Orion, monitor and speakers.

▪ All connected devices are immediately functional without any additional setup.
▪ The touchscreen requires calibration which will be performed automatically during the first login
to the desktop. The touchscreen can also be recalibrated as explained in Settings -> Calibrate
Touchscreen.

To set up the local auto login and power saver settings for the OrionLX video port, see the Display section
in the OrionLX Webpage chapter.

When the Orion is connected to power, touching the power

connectors on the outside of the Orion enclosure, or removing the
top cover of the Orion enclosure and touching the power supply
inside the enclosure, could result in injury or death. Proper
corporate and public safety instructions must always be observed.

It is not advisable to remove the main cover of the Orion Direct

Video model for any reason. The smaller cover may be removed to
gain access to fuses, cards, etc., but the main cover should remain
unopened with the security tape intact. Removal of the main cover
panel could dislodge the protective heat sink pad, causing the heat
sink and/or the CPU to overheat and damage the unit.

303
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
OrionLX Video Port Features
In the following chapters, the Web Browser and the OrionLX webpages are explained. The following screen
(Figure 249) is displayed after powering up the OrionLX and logging in to the desktop.

Figure 249: VGA Port Desktop

Operating Environment
The initial window displayed on the monitor connected to the OrionLX Direct Video port displays the
NovaTech logo and the OrionLX login.

Under the Applications menu in the upper left hand corner of the desktop, a number of applications
are available which are explained in the following chapters. Each application which is relevant for the
operation of the monitor or the OrionLX Direct Video functionality is explained in a separate subchapter.

In the top right corner of the desktop, the name of the user currently logged in is displayed. Clicking the
user name provides the options Lock screen and Log out. Locking the screen keeps the current
session open.

304
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Applications Menu
In this section the available applications will be described. Several of the applications have links to their
on-line Help files or the company’s web site. If the OrionLX does not have Internet access, “Server Not
Found” will be displayed by the browser.

Figure 250: Applications Menu – Main Window

305
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Settings -> Settings Manager

The available settings are standard functions in any windows-style operating system. One of the more
commonly used menu items for customizing is Desktop which provides the following functions.

Figure 251: Settings Manager

On these Desktop settings, the following items can be customized:

▪ Background image and arrangement (Centered, Tiled, Stretched, Scaled, Zoomed)

▪ Background color
▪ Desktop menu
▪ Windows list menu
▪ Default desktop icons
▪ Icon type and size

306
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Settings -> Clear Calibration

After initial connection of a new touchscreen or changing the the screens X and Y orientation, the
touchscreen must be calibrated. The first step in that process is to clear all of the current calibration settings
by selecting Clear Calibration. The second step is to logout of the desktop and then login to insure
that the default settings take effect.

Settings -> Calibrate Touchscreen

After selecting the Calibrate Touchscreen menu item, the following screen is displayed for calibrating
the touchscreen (Figure 252). For best calibration results, a stylus should be used and the screen
calibration ran multiple times. However, the touchscreen can also be calibrated using fingers. Simply follow
the calibration prompts on the screen.

Figure 252: Touchscreen Calibration Procedure

Settings -> Toggle Browser Fullscreen Mode

This menu item will toggle the display from normal deminsions to full screen display or toggle full screen to
normal. For the change to take effect, logout and login to the desk top.

Settings -> Command Line Terminal

This menu item opens a command line terminal window in which any program can be executed if needed,
and as instructed by NovaTech Technical Support.

307
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

Figure 253: Command Line Terminal

Any command listed in the Orion Applications Manual, chapter “Orion Shell Commands” can be used in
this terminal window.

308
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Accessories -> Calculator

This menu item provides a basic calculator (Figure 254). Clicking on View tab provides selection of
Scientific Mode and then clicking on Calculator provides selection of Number bases, Angle
units or Notation modes.

Figure 254: Calculator

Accessories -> Text Editor

A standard text editor is available to edit any text files on the OrionLX if needed. Files to be edited can be
located using the Accessories -> File Manager.

309
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Accessories -> Screenshot

Any screen displayed on the OrionLX monitor can be captured using Screenshot. This is useful for
documenting screens or obtaining technical support.

The screen areas to be captured can be, Entire screen, Active window, or Select a region.
After the selected Delay before capturing time has passed, the screenshot is taken. Save it to a
file on the OrionLX’s flash drive where it is accessible from the PC by FTP or with the Accessories -> File
Manager, and external USB flash drive. In order to copy to a USB flash drive, the file must be given a
FAT32-compatible file name. The USB flash drive must be formatted with FAT32.

Figure 255: Screenshot

310
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Accessories -> File Manager

A standard file browser is available under File Manager. It can be used to browse the internal flash drive
of the OrionLX, and to copy files to and from USB flash drives connected to ports USB2 and USB3. USB
flash drives must be formatted with FAT32. The USB flash drive mounts as a device in the file system and
to remove it from the USB port, must be ejected by clicking the “Eject” button.

Figure 256: File Manager Directory Tree

Graphics -> Document Viewer

A standard document viewer is available using the Document Viewer. It can be used to view any .pdf
file on the OrionLX flash drive. Files to be viewed can be located using the Accessories -> File Manager.

Graphics -> Image Viewer

A standard image viewer is available using the Image Viewer. It can be used to view any graphics file
on the OrionLX flash drive. Files to be viewed can be located using the Accessories -> File Manager.

311
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Multimedia -> Volume Control

The application sets up the audio properties of the Orion.

Figure 257: Volume Control

312
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Network -> Web Browser

Selecting Web Browser opens a new browser tab which can be used for browsing the OrionLX webpages.
When a new browser tab is opened, it defaults to the OrionLX Login webpage (Figure 262). After successful
login, the OrionLX Home tab or the web browser's homepage will be displayed.

When a second web browser page is opend, the Most Visited window opens for selection of the OrionLX
web page to display (Figure 258).

Figure 258: Open Web Browser Page

313
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Network -> Network Analyzer

The network analyzer can capture live communication on all Ethernet ports of the OrionLX (ETH0, ETH1,
and ETH2). The captured packet data can be viewed, saved, and analyzed for network troubleshooting,
protocol debuging and other network administration functions.

For a complete description of the Wireshark functionality, refer to http://www.wireshark.org/docs/.

Figure 259: Wire Shark Network Analyzer

314
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
System -> Terminal Emulator

The Terminal Emulator provides the OrionLX MMI menu as shown in Figure 260 which is also available on
port A as well as through an Ethernet connection. The specific features of the MMI menu are explained in
the section Orion MMI.

Figure 260: OrionLX MMI

315
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Desktop Settings

The desktop settings can be changed by right-clicking anywhere on the desktop screen. The following
context-style window is displayed.

Figure 261: Accessing Desktop Settings

316
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
OrionLX Web Browser
The OrionLX webpages can only be accessed after logging in with OrionLX user credentials. User account
setup is explained in chapter Users.

Figure 262: OrionLX Login Page

Note: If an authority-certified certificate is required in the OrionLX, it must be obtained by the

OrionLX’s owner or operator.

Once logged in, the OrionLX webpages are available in the browser window. The OrionLX will need to be
Unlocked to have access to settings changes and certain features. The complete description of all
webpages is available in section Orion Webpage.

Figure 263: OrionLX Home Page

317
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Setting Home Page in Web Browser

The Web Browser can be set up with a browser homepage. This page can be any webpage provided by
the OrionLX, such as a one-line diagram or an overview page.

1. Start the Web Browser from the Applications Menu.

Figure 264: Start Web Browser

2. In the opened web browser, navigate to the OrionLX webpage that is to become the homepage.

3. At the top left of the web browser, click the Open Web Menu icon (Figure 265) and select
Preferences.

318
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

Figure 265: Open Menu

4. The Preferences window will open and defaults to the General settings tab (Figure 266).

319
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

Figure 266: Preferences for Web Browser

5. In the the Homepage section (Figure 266), click Custom and type the URL of the current OrionLX
web page. Close the Preferences window.

6. The Homepage Icon, , is now displayed on the Web Browser toolbar.

Setting and Using Bookmarks

By setting bookmarks, the most frequently visited OrionLX webpages can be set up for fast access. By
clicking the button at the far right in the URL address field, a bookmark is set for the currently displayed
OrionLX webpage and the bookmarks button changes color to yellow. Click the button to edit this
bookmark (Figure 267). Editing the bookmark name, add to Favorites group, assign Tags or Remove the
bookmark can be accomplished in this window.

320
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

Figure 267: Editing a Bookmark

Click on the View and Manage Bookmarks button, (Figure 268), to show all saved bookmarks. To edit
a bookmark from this list, mouse over the bookmark and click the settings icon, .

Figure 268: View and Manage Bookmarks

321
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

Appendix A - Glossary

Term Description
HMI Human Machine Interface
Input Point An input point is generally a point whose value originates at an end device
(server device), such as a PLC, RTU, IED, relay, or meter, and is transferred
to one or more client devices, such as a SCADA master, or a HMI. During the
transfer, the information may travel over different media (such as dialup or
leased line modems, Ethernet, radio, etc.) as well as different protocols as
dictated by the client’s and end device’s capabilities and locations.
IED Intelligent Electronic Device. This general term includes relays, meters, and
other devices equipped with a microprocessor.
Client Device A client device issues polls or commands to server devices in order to obtain
values from the server device, or to cause specific behavior or actions by the
server device. Typical client devices are SCADA masters and HMIs. If a port
on the Orion is set up as a client port, the OrionLX will initiate communication
with the server device(s) connected to that client port.
NTP Network Time Protocol
Output Point An output point is generally a point whose value originates at a client device
(such as HMI or SCADA master, etc.) and is then transferred to the end device
to control some type of action or behavior of the end device (such as opening
or closing connected switches, control computations, retrieve specific logs,
etc.). During the transfer, the information may travel over different media (such
as dialup or leased line modems, Ethernet, radio, etc.) as well as different
protocols as dictated by the client’s and end device’s capabilities and locations.
PLC Programmable Logic Controller
RTU Remote Terminal Unit
SCADA Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition
Server Device A server device responds to a poll or command from a client device, but
generally does not initiate communications with another device or the client on
its own. Typical server devices are PLCs, RTUs, IEDs, meters, and relays. If
a port on the OrionLX is set up as a server port, an external client must issue
a poll or command to that port of the OrionLX for that port to issue
communication.

Table 127: Glossary

322
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

Appendix B - Inputs / Outputs Tools and Buttons

For easy configuration, numerous tools and buttons are available as shown in Figure 269 and described in
the sections below. The tools and buttons described in this appendix are available for both the Inputs menu
and the Outputs menu. The Inputs menu and the Outputs menu are very similar, so the screenshots of
either menu are nearly identical.

Figure 269: Input/Output Menu Tools

1. Display/Hide Tag Name

Clicking the button to the left of the Inputs – Default Tagnames or Outputs – Default
Tagnames heading hides the Tag Name list, thus providing more usable screen space. Clicking the
button displays the Tag Name list again.

2. Search Point List

The Tag Name list and the Orion Point Name list can be searched using free text. Enter a free text
word such as Reset in the search field. In this case, all point names containing Reset will be filtered and
displayed.
The search field can be cleared by clicking on the Clear Search button, to the right of the search
field. Then the complete points list will be displayed again.

323
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
3. Toggle Show Point Detail
To view configuration details of one or more points, highlight the point(s) in the Tag Name list (left column)
or the Orion Point Name list (right column) and click the Toggle Show Details for Selected
Rows button . To close the point details display, click the Toggle Show Details for Selected
Rows button.

4. Display/Hide Alias Names

If the Add Ons option Alias Module has been configured, the Toggle Alias Column Visibility
button is displayed above the Orion Point Name list in the right pane. Clicking this button will
toggle the display of the Alias points name column.

5. View Report

The View Report button generates a printable report for the points which are currently displayed
in the Orion Point Name list. This report can be printed, previewed, or saved as a file on the PC.

6. Edit Common Attributes

Attributes which are shared by multiple points can be configured to the same setting using the Edit
Common Attributes window. First, select a point type filter tab at the bottom of the pane such as
Binary. Second, highlight all points for which the attributes shall be set up identically. Then click on the
Edit Common Attributes button . The Edit Common Attributes window opens displaying
the common attributes that can be set (Figure 270).

Figure 270: Edit Common Attributes

Clicking Details in the Edit Common Attributes window lists the points to be changed with this
action (Figure 271).

324
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

Figure 271: Edit Common Attributes - Details

Click the check box for the attribute to be changed, edit the attributes setting and click Apply .

7. Font Size
The font size of the Orion Point Name grid can be adjusted by moving the slider. Range is from 10 to
40 point.

325
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
8. Slider Bar

To enlarge either the left or the right points list, move the mouse pointer over the vertical Slider Bar (Figure
272), click and hold the left mouse button, and drag the slider left or right.

Figure 272: Slider Bar

9. Point Type Filter Tabs

Selection of a point type filter tab will filter both the Default Tag Name list and the configured Orion Point
Name list. The filter that is being applied to the name lists is displayed in both panes (Figure 273).

Figure 273: Filter By Point Type

326
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

Appendix C - Backup and Restore User Configuration

This appendix covers the backup and restore process using the Orion webpages. Backup is initiated from
the Systems webpage and the restore will be accomplished from the Files webpage.

Backup User Configuration

From the Orion webpage, select the System tab. Click the Backup button in the User Configuration
box. The Select Items to Backup window allows the selection of Database and/or User Files to
be added to the System Files in the compressed .zip file.

Figure 274: Backup File Selection

Click Backup and in the dialog Figure 275, select the desired action and click OK .

Figure 275: Backup File Action

327
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
If “Open with Windows Explorer” is selected, the sysfiles.zip backup file is placed in the temp file of
the computer which is usually C:/Users/<user_name>/AppData/Local/Temp).

If “Save File” is selected, the sysfiles.zip backup file is downloaded to the download directory of the
PC.

Restore Backup User Configuration

To restore a backup user configuration file to the Orion, select the Files tab. Click
the + Select files… button which opens File Explorer to browse and select the backup file
sysfiles.zip (Figure 276) that will be downloaded to the Orion.

Note: The file name must be sysfiles.zip for the restore process to succeed. If the file name
is sysfiles(x).zip or sysfiles_x_.zip the file will not be sent to the Orion and
restored.

Figure 276: Select File – Restore Backup

After selecting the backup file, click Open and the Select Items to Restore window, Figure 277,
opens for selecting which set of files from the backup is to be restored.

328
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

Figure 277: Restore Items Selection

After selecting what files are to be restored, click the Restore button. The Files tab window, (Figure
278), is displayed showing that the backup file is ready to be downloaded to the Orion by clicking Send .

Figure 278: Send File to Orion

Click OK to acknowledge the restore process. Then the Orion will automatically restart. When the restart
has completed, the Home page login will be displayed.

329
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

Figure 279: Restore Confirmation

Figure 280: Restarting Orion

330
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

Appendix D - Maintenance
Opening the OrionLX Enclosure
The OrionLX enclosure can be opened for the following operations:
▪ Replacement of the fuse as described in OrionLX Fuse Replacement.
▪ Installation or replacement of communication cards as described in Port 1-16 Card Options.

Note that the top cover of the OrionLX CPX cannot be replaced in the field. Therefore, the battery cannot
be replaced in the field.

When removing the top cover or a side panel of the Orion, observe precautions for
handling electrostatic sensitive devices.

When opening the OrionLX enclosure, perform the following steps.

1. Remove the OrionLX from service by disconnecting the power cord and external connectors.
2. Remove the lid.
3. Perform the desired operation.
4. Reinstall the lid and restore the OrionLX to service.

Opening the OrionLX+ Enclosure

The OrionLX+ enclosure can be opened for the following operations:
▪ Replacement of the fuse as described in OrionLX+ Fuse Replacement.
▪ Replacement of the battery as described in Battery Replacement.
▪ Installation or replacement of communication cards as described in Port 1-16 Card Options.
▪ Changing the input voltage from of the four digital inputs of the NovaCard #0 I/O as described in
NovaCard #0 (NC0).
▪ Changing the input voltage from of the four digital inputs of the NovaCard #1 I/O as described in
NovaCard #1 (NC1).
▪ Changing the input voltage from of the four digital inputs of the NovaCard #3 I/O as described in
NovaCard #3 (NC3).

When removing the top cover or a side panel of the Orion, observe precautions for
handling electrostatic sensitive devices.

When opening the OrionLX+ enclosure, perform the following steps.

1. Remove the OrionLX+ from service by disconnecting the power cord and external connectors.
2. Remove the lid at the top, or remove the NovaCard on the rear panel.
3. Perform the desired operation.
4. Reinstall the lid and restore the OrionLX+ to service.

331
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Orion Storage and Unpowered Standby
Like any device, the Orion experiences shelf aging when not used regularly. Some of the effects of shelf
aging can be reduced or reversed by powering the device periodically.

In the event that an Orion product or Orion product spare components will either not be in use or remain in
storage for longer than a year, we strongly recommend applying power to the unit(s) on a yearly schedule.

Please contact NovaTech for recommendations regarding your specific application.

Battery Replacement
The OrionLX and OrionLX+ use a BR2030 Lithium coin-cell battery to maintain the real-time clock when
the Orion is unpowered. NovaTech recommends replacing the battery every ten years as part of standard
maintenance. If the Orion is stored unpowered for long periods of time (greater than a cumulative total of
four years unpowered), then the internal coin-cell battery should be replaced every five years instead of
every ten years.

Replace the battery with the same type of battery to maintain performance over the entire Orion temperature
range.

When removing the top cover or a side panel of the Orion, observe precautions for
handling electrostatic sensitive devices.

To replace the battery, complete the following steps.

1. Remove the Orion from service by disconnecting the power cord and external connectors.
2. Remove the front panel screws and fold away the front panel to gain access.
3. Locate and remove the battery. When removing the battery, note the orientation.
4. Observing polarity, slide the new battery into the holder until the snaps into place in the holder.
5. Reinstall the front panel and restore the Orion to service.
6. Discard old battery in accordance with applicable laws.

Cleaning
Cleaning the exterior of the instrument shall be limited to the wiping of the instrument using a soft damp
cloth applicator with cleaning agents that are not alcohol based and are non-flammable and non-explosive.

332
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

Appendix E – GPL License Information

Some of the software included in this product contains copyrighted software that is licensed under the
GPLv2 and GPLv3 licenses. You may obtain the complete Corresponding Source code from us by sending
a money order or check for $5 to:

NovaTech, LLC
GPL Compliance Division
13555 West 107th Street
Lenexa, KS 66215

Please write “GPL source for OrionLX” in the memo line of your payment.

This offer is valid to anyone in receipt of this information.

333
 OrionLX/OrionLX+

Appendix F - Additional Documentation

The additional documentation listed below represent the main documents which may be required for setting
up and operating the Orion. In addition, for each protocol or software module, the respective manual is
included in the NCD installation .zip file or CD.

By default, the NCD installation stores the NovaTech documentation files in C:\Program Files
(x86)\NovaTech LLC\NCD3\Docs. Third-Party documentation is not included in the NCD installation
and cannot be verified as accurate by NovaTech.

Document Title File Name

Alarm/Archive/Retentive Software Manual Software_Alarm_Archive_Retentive.pdf
Analog/Accumulator Scaling Technical Note TechNote_Scaling.pdf
Average Archive Module Software Manual Software_Average_Archive.pdf
Cascaded Orions Software Manual Software_Cascaded.pdf
DA Logic Software Manual Software_DA_Logic.pdf
Data Logger Software Manual Software_Data_Logger.pdf
DNP3 Client Software Manual Protocol_DNP3_Client.pdf
Email Software Manual Software_Email.pdf
IEC 61131 Logic Software Manual Software_IEC61131-3.pdf
IEC 61850 Client Software Manual Protocol_IEC61850_Client.pdf
LogicPak Software Manual Software_LogicPak.pdf
Advanced Math & Logic Software Manual Software_AdvancedMath&Logic.pdf
Points Blocking Module Software Manual Software_Points_Blocking.pdf
Pseudo Client Software Manual Software_Pseudo_Client.pdf
Pusher Software Manual Software_Pusher.pdf
Redundancy Software Manual Software_Redundancy.pdf
System & Point Logger Software Manual Software_System&Points_Logger.pdf
Text Software Manual Software_Text_Generator.pdf

Table 128: NovaTech Documentation

Document Title Vendor Purpose

MultiModem & SocketModem MT 9234 Series MultiTech User manual for OrionLX internal modem.

Table 129: Third-Party Documentation

334
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Revision Date Changes
A 11/21/2008 Initial Release for OrionLX. PR
B 11/15/2009 Update of NCD3, webpage, MMI, overview, layout. BM
C 08/29/2010 Updated email address, power supply specs, safety specs, mounting
instruction, section D, added Page Security section, updated Settings tab
for OrionLX webpage: Remote Accts, Auth Rules, WebUI. SZ, BM
D 01/03/2011 Expanded mounting instructions, added Installing Serial Bit card TN to
Additional Documentation. Updated product number list. SZ
E 06/10/2011 Add lockout recovery instructions and OrionLX shell command list. SZ
F 12/02/2011 Added IEC 61131, editorial updates. DC, BM
G 01/13/2012 Updated HCS fiber description. Added ST fiber information for serial port
and Ethernet port. Added network setup information. Added fuse
information. Layout update. Added modem string explanation. BM
H 04/12/2012 Added Direct Video and jumper information for –A and –G comm cards,
updated comm card information. Moved firewall example and shell
command list to OrionLX Applications Manual. BM
I 09/19/2012 Removed Points per Port entry on B-2 as per Mantis 0001281. MM
J 02/20/2013 Updated PLL Status Description. Edited Enable Routing description per
Mantis 0001184. Edited Authentication parameters and Remote Root Login
per Mantis 0001415. Added Group ID to Table 67 per Mantis 0001491. MM
Updated webpage screen shots for distro 7.5. BM
K 08/28/2013 Updated terminology of Modules/Protocols. Added Authorized
Representation. Updated certification information. MM
Added note about IP addresses for each Ethernet port. New NCD acronym.
Added SSSD installation information and alarming/tagging/control group
information. BM
L 05/06/2014 Updated NCD screenshots. Updated OrionLX webpage screenshots.
Revised Tables 4, 25, and associated text. Added points to Table 48. Added
description for Document Viewer. Added Warnings in OrionLX Direct Video
section. Updated Remote Accounts information. Updated Static Route
configuration information. Added networking bonding information. Updated
DNS information on WebUI settings page. Added warning regarding
Ethernet configuration on same subnet in Networking WebUI section.
General text editing throughout. Added NCD Sensor setup screen and
description. MM
M 02/09/2015 Updated IRIG-B pinout table for G Card. Relocated Sensor description to
the Add-On hierarchy. Added View Tagging Archive section. Updated
Additional Documentation table. MM, BM
N 07/08/2015 Added new section for periodic powering. Added new information about
Alias assignment. NF
O 11/09/2015 Added “OrionLX Ethernet PRP Module” section. Added “Inactive Redirect”
section. NF
P 04/08/2016 Updated “Digital Inputs,” “Digital Outputs,” “IRIG-B Port,” and “Add CSV
Task” sections. Removed mentions of msense text events that are no longer
supported (Table 47). NF

335
 OrionLX/OrionLX+
Revision Date Changes
Q 09/15/2017 Updated NCD functional descriptions and screenshots. Updated LogicPak
information. Updated PRP card field upgrade procedure. Updated Firewall
configuration information. Added network interface bonding configuration
information. Updated MMI interface information. RM
R 10/30/2018 Updated Orion Web Interface information. Added user configuration backup
and restore information in Appendix C. Updated the local Direct Video Port,
Web Browser information. RM
S 05/01/2019 Added OrionLX+ features and specifications. Updated NCD functional
descriptions and screenshots for the configuration of the Hardware I/O, SER
port. RM
T 04/23/2020 Added Certification related revisions for OrionLX+.
U 07/07/2021 Updated WebUI chapter with latest Network setup information. Updated
NCD information with client/server changes. RM
V 04/21/2022 Added NC0 card. Updated trending and power supply voltage. Added
Windows 11. Added keying. Updated Settings pages for 9.8.1.

336